JP7418847B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, various winning openings (starting opening, big winning opening, general winning opening) are provided in a gaming area where game balls can flow down. When game balls enter the various winning holes, prize balls are awarded to the player.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to players.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be executed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number ,
It is possible to display the effect pattern that shows whether it is a hit or not after changing it and then stopping.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, during the execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced performance symbol in which the performance symbol is reduced is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped .
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute winning games that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be executed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number,
It is possible to execute a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the winning game will be executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when it is suggested that the winning game will be executed during the execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced winning suggesting performance in which the winning suggesting performance is reduced can be executed.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute winning games that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be executed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number,
Execute the advance notice performance asynchronously with the currently running performance,
Continuing the advance notice performance at least until the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number,
In one winning game, it is set that a specified number of prize balls can be awarded,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number is a number obtained by subtracting the specified number from the reference number.

According to the present invention, it is possible to avoid awarding excessive prize balls to the player.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view showing the second grand prize winning device etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in a standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are activated. FIG. 3 is a front view of the unit. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view showing a 7-segment display. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to general drawings, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special drawings. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a look-ahead determination table. This is a jackpot game control table. It is an explanatory diagram of a gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of production mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SP reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable body effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of operation performance. It is a figure which shows the over-winning ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls. (A) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of an over-prize ball abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of a magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball preview image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop preview image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple border image is displayed in the high accuracy high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red border image is displayed in the high accuracy high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of input processing. It is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of outer end signal output processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1m timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart of 10m timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the case where the operation attention calling performance is performed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a case where an operation attention-calling effect is executed after illegal magnetism is detected. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the remaining reservation special effect in the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the round alternative performance and the time-saving mode alternative performance in the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the remaining reservation alternative special effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the special effect after a normal transition in a 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the alternative performance after a normal transition in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing in a fifth modification. It is a figure which shows the case where a contact alert production is performed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated in the fifth modification. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a case where a contact alert effect is executed after illegal magnetism is detected in a fifth modification. It is a diagram showing a case where the game is stopped after the variable probability mode alternative performance in the sixth modification. It is a figure which shows the case where a game is stopped after a round alternative production in a 7th modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 8th modification. It is a figure which shows the standard number arrival notice performance and mini-screen performance in the 8th modification. It is a figure which shows the standard number arrival notice performance and mini-screen performance in the 8th modification. It is a figure which shows a blessing effect and a mini-screen effect in the 8th modification. It is a jackpot symbol type determination table in the ninth modification. This is a jackpot game control table in the ninth modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 9th modification. It is a figure which shows the next jackpot achievement suggestion production and the mini next jackpot achievement suggestion production in the ninth modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 10th modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and the residual ball number notification performance in the 10th modification. It is a figure which shows the setting of the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and the setting of the residual ball number notification performance at the time of the initial setting after power-on in the 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and the residual ball number notification performance in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart of main side timer interruption processing in a 12th modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a balance display part in the situation where a game cannot be performed in the 12th modification. In the 12th modification, (A) is a diagram showing a notification effect that a ball cannot be rented when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, and (B) is a diagram showing a notification effect that a ball cannot be rented when illegal magnetism is detected. It is a diagram. In the 13th modification, it is a diagram showing the setting of the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and the setting of the residual ball number notification performance during the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls in a modification. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference number of balls is displayed on a 7 segment display in a modification. It is a front view showing an enclosed pachinko machine in which a 6-digit 7-segment display is arranged in a modified example.

Embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In this specification, in order to simplify the description, by writing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc. for the symbols or codes may be omitted or May be abbreviated. Furthermore, in any flowchart described below, the execution order of a plurality of processes in any plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel within a range that does not cause inconsistency in the processing contents.

1. Structure of the gaming machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 5. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" is the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "back" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1 toward the pachinko machine PY1. shall be.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22. Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU to be described later is attached, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board mounting frame 2A and the transparent plate 23t face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor (gaming parlor), a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 visually recognizes the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. be able to. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball to make the game ball fire (the amount by which the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is being Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k. Further, a lower decorative body 36 that largely protrudes forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 for storing game balls to be supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36. Further, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as "normal button") 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 that is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like. Although not shown in FIG. 1, a select button (cross key) for selecting up, down, left, and right is provided on the left side of the normal button 40.

On the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36, on the right side of the normal button 40, there are provided a balance display section 61, a ball lending button 62 that can be pressed down, and a return button 63 that can be pressed down. The balance display section 61 shows a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent by inserting cash, a prepaid card, or the like into the card unit CU. The ball lending button 62 (operation means), when pressed, enables ball lending up to the number shown on the balance display section 61. When the return button 63 is pressed, it is used to take out a card containing numerical information (information on the number of game balls that can be lent) shown on the balance display section 61 from the card unit CU. .

Further, a speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 that is formed to protrude forward from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 (sound output means) includes a left speaker 52L placed on the left side and a right speaker 52R placed on the right side. Further, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 in the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached above the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m as a performance device for the purpose of increasing game interest. The frame moving device 58 includes a left frame moving device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame moving device 58R arranged on the right side.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using mainly FIGS. 2 to 5. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. At approximately the center of the game board 1, an opening 1A is formed which is approximately circular when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall 1B is formed to protrude forward and define a game area 6 through which game balls can flow. Further, on the outside of the inner wall portion 1B, a substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is formed to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a game area 6 is formed which is surrounded by an inner wall part 1B, an outer wall part 1C, etc. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nail enters the game area 6 and moves the game ball flowing down the game area 6 through a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first winning opening 14, which will be described later. And, a route is configured to appropriately guide the player to the second grand prize opening 15 and the like.

In the gaming area 6, there is a first starting winning device 11D in which a first starting opening 11 into which a game ball can enter is formed, and a second starting winning device 11D that makes it possible or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12. A device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided.

The first starting winning device 11D is immovable. Therefore, the ease with which game balls enter the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). Winning a prize in the first starting hole 11 of a game ball is done by drawing the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1") (obtaining and determining the random number related to Special Figure 1 described below: hereinafter referred to as "Lottery of Special Figure 1"). ) and the variable display of special drawing 1 (identification pattern). Furthermore, when the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D includes an operable electric tube opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position in which it is impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12. When the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can enter the second starting port 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D, and only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 12. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. Further, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is opened", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

Winning the game ball into the second starting hole 12 is determined by drawing the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2") (obtaining and determining the random number related to Special Figure 2 described below: hereinafter referred to as "Lottery of Special Figure 2") ”) and the variable display of special drawing 2 (identification pattern). Furthermore, when the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a general winning hole 10 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the lottery of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol") (that is, the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number: hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery") and the variable display of a regular symbol. It has become. The electric chew 12D is opened by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game that involves opening the electric chew 12D.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT14D") in which a first big winning opening 14 into which a game ball can enter is formed.

The first big prize winning device 14D includes a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can operate in an open state and a closed state. The first big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that closes the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 14. In this way, the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 12. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a second grand prize winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") in which a second grand prize opening 15 into which game balls can enter is formed. The second big prize winning device 15D includes an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second grand prize opening 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can take an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second grand prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second big prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When the game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize winning device 15D will be explained in detail using FIG. 3. Inside the second big winning device 15D, there is provided a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a that can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 and allow the game ball to pass downward. It is being

A specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 15a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 15a are sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The sorting device 16D includes a sorting member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k when viewed from the front in FIG. 3(A) is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above it. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through a non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: in a front view of FIG. 3(B)) in which the game ball is allowed to pass (enter) the specific area 16. The left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above it, leaving the area directly above the specific area 16 open. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Note that basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Then, only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can change to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect the game ball that has passed through (entered) each area 16 and 17 and allow the game ball to pass downward. .

Note that it is possible to provide only one of the first grand prize device 14D and the second grand prize device 15D within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Furthermore, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 that can emit light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game balls can flow down can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is referred to as "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is referred to as "right-handed hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the right hand. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided. Therefore, by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the second starting opening 12, the first big winning opening 14, or the second You can aim to win the big prize opening 15.

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15), It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Further, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (a portion other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays special figure 2, and a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays general figure 1. A general figure display 82 is included. In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 pending display 83a that displays the number of special figure 1 pending (U1: the number of variable displays of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a), which will be described later. Also included is a special figure 2 pending display 83b that displays the number of special figure 2 pending (U2: the number of reserved special figures 2 that is variablely displayed by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the lottery of the special figure 1 is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the lottery of the special figure 2 is held in response to the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 12. In addition, in the following explanation, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are collectively called the special drawing, and the drawing of the special drawing 1 and the drawing of the special drawing 2 are collectively called the special drawing drawing. Moreover, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed variably and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stopping special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, that is, a jackpot symbol), the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15) is opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played.

The special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special drawing display 81 will display "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, A jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed, such as (: off). In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the special drawing display 81 will display a losing pattern consisting of only the LED on the far right lighting up, such as "■■■■■■■□" do. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the manner of variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific manner).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball hits the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (numerical information and judgment information) are generated for special drawing drawings, etc. example) may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later, as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the various random numbers obtained by winning (balls entering) the game ball into the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1 related random numbers", and the various random numbers obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12 The various random numbers obtained by (ball entry) are referred to as "special map 2 related random numbers." Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figure 1 reservations) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figure 2 reservations). It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4). In addition, hereinafter, the special map 1 reservation and the special map 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special map reservation", and the number of special diagrams 1 and 2 reserved are collectively referred to as "the number of special diagrams reserved". In addition, the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special figure related random numbers."

In the pachinko game machine PY1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically, while the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If a prize is won during execution of a jackpot game or a jackpot game, the variable display of the special drawing (or the right to draw the special drawing) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 is consumed when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining the special figure related random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of the special figure to show the determination result.

Then, the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation display 83. Each of the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special symbols reserved. Is possible.

Further, the variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed variably and then stopped. The general map that is stopped and displayed (the stationary general map, the general map derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one general map selected from among a plurality of types of general maps by lottery. If the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure (ordinary figure with a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) is opened. .

The common map display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the common map according to the result of the general map lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the common symbol lottery is a win, the common symbol display 82 displays a winning symbol consisting of both LEDs lighting up, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). If the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern such as "■□" consisting of only the right LED being lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of variable display of the ordinary map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of variable display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs blinking at once, unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a regular symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a regular symbol lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the later-described normal pattern holding storage section 106 on the condition that the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) to the number of general drawings that can be stored in the general drawing holding storage section 106 (the number of general drawings pending). In addition, below, the normal pattern random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 13 is also referred to as the "normal pattern related random number."

Next, the performance unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. The production unit 1U is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. The performance unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "top board moving device") 55, and a second board moving device (hereinafter referred to as "bottom board moving device") 56.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc., and includes a display screen 50a that can display patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k. The underboard movable device 56 is disposed in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5A schematically shows how the above-panel movable body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not operating. When the drive source of the on-panel movable device 55 is driven, the on-panel movable body 55k moves downward (down), and when the drive source of the under-panel movable device 56 is driven, the under-panel movable body 56k moves upward (raised). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered on-board movable body 55k or the raised under-board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 to 9. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has various functions such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of a general drawing, and auxiliary games. A game control board (hereinafter also referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls gaming profits (progress of the game), and game performances (special figure fluctuation performance, hold performance, jackpot game) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 A performance control board that controls performances such as a customer waiting performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts operations during the period when the operation of the normal button 40 and special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), hereinafter also referred to as a "sub control board" ) 120, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., are provided on the back side further than the image display device 50 of the game board 1 (see FIG. 8). The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. Further, the effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects, together with an image control board 140, a lamp control circuit 151, and an audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The production control unit includes at least a production control board 120, and controls game production using production means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, etc.), It is sufficient if the waiting effect and the operation promotion effect can be controlled.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the production control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed down. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means) clears game information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described later) (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, the number of special symbols on hold). This is for clearing (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board. It's okay.

Further, the power supply board 190 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 192. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, a power switch 193 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON or OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches the power on or off. In addition, the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the production control board 120 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the gaming, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage section 107, and the non-erasable storage section 107 is provided with a total prize ball number storage section 107a, a total fired ball number storage section 107b, and a difference ball number storage section 107c. It is being In the non-erasable storage section 107, even if RAM clear is executed, the gaming CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents. The non-erasable storage unit 107 (total prize ball number storage unit 107a, total fired ball number storage unit 107b, difference ball number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and includes a total of 32 lighting (light-emitting) parts. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes, in order from left to right, a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting parts (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so that they can each represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the jackpot determination probability. The interior of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted therein. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing and operating the RAM clear switch 191, the machine shifts to the setting mode where the setting value can be set. can do. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, only one type of setting value, "1", is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". Note that when the setting mode is set, if the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting change mode is ended and RAM clear is executed.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed down. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the gaming hall who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be explained in detail later. Furthermore, a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting port sensor that detects game balls that have entered the first starting port 11, and a second sensor that detects game balls that have entered the second starting port 12. A starting hole sensor, a general winning hole sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10, a gate sensor that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the first large winning hole 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects the game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), Also included is a non-specific area sensor 17a that detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17).

Further, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor that detects all the game balls (total number of shot balls) flowing down the game area 6. Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the lower part of the game board mounting frame 2. Therefore, the discharge port sensor is provided within the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter a game ball into the various winning holes 10, 11, 12, and 14. When each of the above-mentioned sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content.

Further, the various sensors MS include a front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 23 to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects opening of the front frame 23m to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid that drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D, and a solenoid that drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. It includes a first big winning opening solenoid, a second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k of the sorting device 16D. . Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 is connected to a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a payout device 73. At the same time, the firing device 72 is connected via the firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for payout control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for payout control") 171 that can execute control processing related to payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 includes a payout ROM that stores a program for controlling payouts, a payout RAM used as a work memory, a payout CPU that executes the program stored in the payout ROM, and data and signals. A dispensing I/O port section (input/output circuit) for inputting and outputting is included.

The payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) pays out prize balls using the payout device 73 based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. , and pay out rental balls (ball rental). For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 (wins a prize), a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 to the payout control board 170. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal uses the payout device 73 based on the number of prize balls stored in the payout ROM to determine the number of balls entering the first starting port 11. The prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out. At this time, the game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, a firing volume knob is connected to the firing device 72 and is capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160. That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 is for transmitting an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the gaming status, and information indicating an error or fraud (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted through asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

Further, a balance display board 172 is connected to the payout control board 170. The balance display board 172 controls the display of the number (the number of game balls that can be lent) shown on the balance display section 61. That is, when cash or a prepaid card or the like is inserted into the card unit CU, a signal including information on the number of game balls that can be lent out is transmitted to the balance display board 172 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the balance display board 172 causes the balance display section 61 to display a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent. In this way, if the balance display section 61 displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent out, this indicates that the lent out of balls is possible.

Further, a ball lending button sensor 62a (see FIG. 6) that can detect a press operation on the ball lending button 62 is provided. , the ball lending button sensor 62a is connected to the card unit CU via a balance display board 172 and a payout control board 170. Therefore, when the ball lending button sensor 62a detects a press operation on the ball lending button 62, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the card unit CU uses the payout control board 170 and the payout device 73 to lend game balls. That is, the payout control microcomputer 171 (ball lending control unit) executes paying out of rental balls (ball lending) using the payout device 73 based on receiving the ball lending signal from the card unit CU. Further, the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) transmits a signal including information on the number of game balls lent out to the balance display board 172. As a result, the balance display board 172 newly displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be lent out at the present time.

Further, a return button sensor 63a (see FIG. 6) that can detect a pressing operation on the return button 63 is provided. The return button sensor 63a is connected to the card unit CU via the balance display board 172 and the payout control board 170. Therefore, when the return button sensor 63a detects a pressing operation on the return button 63, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. As a result, the card unit CU takes out a card containing information on the number of game balls that can be lent at the present time. Also, at this time, the balance display board 172 displays "0" on the balance display section 61 for a predetermined second to indicate that there are no game balls that can be lent, and then displays nothing on the balance display section 61. Do not display.

Further, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the production control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 based on various commands sent from the main control board 100. The connection between the main control board 100 and the performance control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 100 and the production control board 120 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and performance storage in the performance ROM 123. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

Further, the performance ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Furthermore, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power when the pachinko game machine PY1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates using power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided therein. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the production control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be used as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the image display device based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. 50 display control is performed. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It is equipped with Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display screen 50a.

Note that the display list is made up of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. Output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be used as a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the performance control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Further, the effect control board 120 controls the lighting of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a, a special button detection switch 41a, and a select button detection switch. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal according to the detected content to the production control board 120. Further, various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a handle rotation detection sensor 42a. The handle rotation detection sensor 42a detects a rotation operation of the handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player, and is provided inside the handle 72k. Therefore, when the handle 72k is rotated, the handle rotation detection sensor 42a detects the rotation of the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the production control board 120. Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the production control board 120 include motors that drive the above-board moving device 55, the below-board moving device 56, the frame moving device 58, etc., and drive the motors to drive each moving device. It is possible to perform a predetermined operation. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the production control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a panel lamp 54, etc., and each lamp is made to emit light. In detail, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of each lamp and control the operation of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM. Further, the type and number of lamps connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular lottery when the fired game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a random number related to a common pattern when a basic pattern fluctuation starting condition is satisfied when performing such a series of games (general pattern lottery, variable display of normal pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), the acquired ordinary symbol-related random numbers include ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using one or more hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. In other words, the gaming state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the hit determination table. In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number values) are assigned to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, a normal pattern variation pattern is determined for variable display of the normal pattern. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Furthermore, the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary figure fluctuation The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern using one or more ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(B). The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) and the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol (losing common symbol) is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is Regarding the variable display of ordinary figures in the case where the ordinary figures are stopped and displayed, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display of figures, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. A variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. Further, these ordinary figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery).

The auxiliary game includes elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components), that is, various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state. Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game based on the game state using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 11(C). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Further, the number of openings and opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 0.08 seconds)). Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 3.00 seconds)). Open. Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. Pachinko game machine PY1 performs a lottery for special drawing 1 when the fired game ball enters the first starting slot 11. When the special drawing 1 lottery is held, the special drawing 1 display 81a displays the special drawing 1 variably (stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the drawing of the special drawing 1. Here, the special symbol 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the lottery results for special map 1 include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12, a special drawing 2 lottery is performed. When the special drawing 2 lottery is held, the special drawing 2 display 81b displays the special drawing 2 variably (variably displays and then stops displaying) to notify the result of the special drawing 2 drawing. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 2 lottery include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, below, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned general symbols.

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a special pattern-related random number when a starting condition is established in order to play a series of games (special pattern drawing, variable display of special pattern, jackpot game, and setting of gaming state). Perform various judgments regarding random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10(B), the special pattern related random numbers to be obtained include special pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot pattern type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number for determining reach. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Note that the random number is sometimes referred to as determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot Judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or more jackpot judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(A). The gaming states include a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether the game is in the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as a jackpot judgment table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot judgment table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot judgment table) and a jackpot judgment table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot judgment table). It is possible.

In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) is determined by using one or more jackpot symbol type determination tables as shown in FIG. ). For each type of jackpot symbol, it is possible to associate the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the prize was won due to the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination to occur). is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, there is a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing the variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Further, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type based on the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is set to 50% for jackpot symbol X and 50% for jackpot symbol Y, and for special symbol 2. It is possible for the jackpot symbol Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type 100% based on the jackpot symbol type determination. In this way, the jackpot symbol type is determined by the special drawing 1 lottery, which is held when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11, and the special drawing 2 drawing, which is held when a gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 12. It is possible to make the allocation ratio different.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment determines whether or not to generate a reach with the special symbol variation effect described later, using one or more reach judgment tables as shown in FIG. 12(C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. This is a judgment to determine whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, the reach determination table is distinguished between a reach determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time saving state (time saving reach determination table). Is possible.

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (random value of reach establishment) is divided into the reach judgment results "reach exists (reach occurs)" and "reach does not occur (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach). As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach establishment random values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, "with reach (generates reach)", which is performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot judgment is "loss", is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (does not cause reach)" is referred to as "loss with reach". )” is sometimes referred to as “no-reach loss.”

3-2-4. Special pattern fluctuation To determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern, use one or more special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) as shown in Figures 13 to 14 to determine the fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern (Special figure fluctuation pattern) This is a judgment to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern, and is carried out in both cases where the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (performance content) of the special symbol variation performance. As the special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns each having different identification information, and the number thereof can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that is variablely displayed as the target of determination, in other words, the type of starting opening where a winning is made due to the special figure variation pattern determination. That is, as the special figure variation pattern judgment table, there is a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: FIG. 13) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) that is sometimes used.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

Further, each special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, or a reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. In addition, each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for no-reach losing can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no reach loss that is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss.

Then, the special figure display device 81 performs a variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Ru.

Further, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with a production flow of a special figure variation production as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 13 to 14.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables in Figures 13 and 14, names can be attached to the special figure fluctuation patterns in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production content of the special figure fluctuation effect. be. For example, a special pattern fluctuation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot fluctuation." On the other hand, a special symbol fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in a loss with reach is called "SP loss fluctuation", and a special pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in loss with reach. The figure variation pattern is called "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, which is a type of reach, is called "N loss variation", which is a loss with reach. Such a special pattern variation pattern is referred to as a "normal loss variation."

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination Pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs pre-reading determination using one or more pre-reading determination tables as shown in FIG. 15, based on the acquired special figure related random numbers. The look-ahead determination includes, for example, determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, determining which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be in the jackpot symbol type determination, and determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot symbol type determination. There is a determination as to which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special figure variation pattern determination. The pre-reading determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the pre-reading determination table, there is a pre-reading determination table (first pre-reading determination table) when a prize is won in the first starting opening 11, and a pre-reading determining table (second pre-reading determination table) when winning in the second starting opening 12. , it is possible to distinguish between

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. That is, the look-ahead determination table is distinguished between a look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving look-ahead decision table) and a look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state (time-saving look-ahead decision table). Is possible.

In other words, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead decision table used in the non-time saving state, a first look-ahead decision table used in the time save state, and a second look-ahead decision table used in the non-time save state. It is possible to distinguish between the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state and the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state. Note that what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be explained. A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and a round game from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round. It includes an opening (also written as OP) and an ending (also written as ED) from the end of the final round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, it is possible to not provide OP and ED. Note that hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)," and the 10th round game is called "10 rounds (10R)."

The elements constituting such a jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 14 or second big winning hole 15) in each round game, It includes the type and opening time (opening pattern) of each big winning opening that will be opened, the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. After the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or more jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As the jackpot game, it is possible to control one or more types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16, from 1R to 9R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. An open round game will be played. In 10R (final round), a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds is played. It will be done. In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected by the big winning hole sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning holes 14 and 15 has elapsed, End the round game.

Further, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot game can be played using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15, or only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 has a closed state in which prizes cannot be won and an open state in which prizes can be won by the distribution member 16k, so the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16. In the following, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operating manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner), but the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operational manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner). In combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big prize opening 15 in the jackpot game, the difficulty (ease) of letting the game ball enter the specific area 16 in the jackpot game is set. Note that, hereinafter, the state in which the specific region 16 is in an open state is also referred to as "V open".

For 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening starts, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big prize opening 15, the time and the period during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. From the relationship with the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big winning hole 15, and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. Due to the relationship with timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). In this way, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member is used in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a jackpot game in which the game ball 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. A jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V-long opening pattern as described above is called a "V-long jackpot." On the other hand, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a V-short opening pattern is referred to as a "V-short jackpot."

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state", "high probability high base gaming state", and " It is possible to set the game state to any one of the "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability high base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "high probability". The "low base state" and the "high probability high base gaming state" can be respectively abbreviated as the "high probability high base state." The gaming states include a state related to the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the jackpot determination, and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "low probability high base gaming state" and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is the normal probability. The high probability state is set in the "high probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, in a jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is possible to switch to a high probability state. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high probability state can be switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in a "low probability low base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" or "jackpot gaming state". The time saving state is set in the "low probability high base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a gaming state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state. It is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is longer (for example, 3.00 seconds) than the opening time (for example, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment is performed using a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that is set so that the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a short special pattern fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. It is also possible to do so (see FIGS. 13 and 14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to easily make the normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, a regular pattern fluctuation time (5 seconds) is determined which is shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the short time state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater.

Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to determine a hit in the hit determination compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a win is determined with a higher probability (for example, 59936/65536) than in the non-time-saving state (for example, 6600/65536). Therefore, in the time saving state, the number of times that a hit is determined to be a hit per unit time is greater.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, winnings are more likely to be won, the normal figure fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer. Three points are set to be advantageous to the player regarding the game related to the common map. However, only some of these points may be set advantageously for this player.

The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 after it is powered on for the first time is a "low probability low base gaming state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time saving state are set. This gaming state is also referred to as a "normal gaming state." In addition, in the "jackpot game state", a hit determination is performed but a jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. Furthermore, regarding the gaming states, it is possible to use all or only some of the gaming states described above. In addition, game states other than the normal gaming state include "high probability high base state", "high probability low base state", "low probability high base state", "high probability state", "time saving state", and "high base state". ”, the “jackpot gaming state” can be called a “bonus gaming state” in which a privilege is given to the player.

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 24.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special symbol fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variation production and indicates that it is in a standby state where no special symbol variation production is being performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-1), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display screen 50a ("light amount settings"), and frequency settings for the effects to be performed ("effect settings").

The normal performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability low base game state" and indicates a non-time saving state. The normal presentation mode includes, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image representing a daytime mountain scene (daytime normal background image G102) is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-1). 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image representing an evening mountain scene (evening normal background image G103) is displayed on the display screen 50a, and FIG. 18(B-2). -3) As shown in 3), there is a third normal performance mode in which a background image representing a nighttime mountain scene (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display screen 50a. It can be switched on the condition that the special figure variation effect is performed once or multiple times. Furthermore, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a normal second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the normal first stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the normal second stage production mode, depending on the type of reach A dedicated background image will be displayed. An effect in which the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, or the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "normal mode effect." A player viewing the normal mode performance can be made to understand that the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state (low probability low base gaming state). In addition, the normal production mode is also set in the "high probability low base gaming state", and the "normal mode production" is also executed when the special symbol variation production is being performed in the "high probability low base gaming state". You may also do so. Alternatively, a special effect mode may be provided that is set only in the "high probability low base gaming state".

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when a special symbol variation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the probability variable performance mode includes a probability variable first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol fluctuation performance, and a probability variable second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the probability variable first stage production mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the probability variation second stage production mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed. The effect in which the probability change background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "probability change mode effect (advantageous effect)." A player watching the probability variable mode production can understand that the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state (high probability state and time saving state).

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates the normal probability state and the time-saving state. In the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the low-probability-high base state ends is shown in the upper right corner of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving performance mode includes a time-saving first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a time-saving second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the time-saving first performance mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the time-saving second stage performance mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed. The effect in which the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "time-saving mode effect." A player watching the time-saving mode performance can be made aware that the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability-high base state (normal probability state and time-saving state).

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening performance in which the winning image G108 is displayed is performed. During a round in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-2), on the display screen 50a, a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds, a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out, and a city A round effect (advantageous effect) is performed in which a background image representing the round (round background image G114) is displayed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), on the display screen 50a, an ending image G111 indicating the production mode to be set after the jackpot game, and the total amount paid out in the jackpot game state are displayed. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which a total prize ball number image G112 indicating the prize ball number is displayed.

Note that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special Figure Variation Effect Next, the special figure variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation production, a variation display of production symbols is performed on the display screen 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production design is composed of, for example, number symbols from 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production design, the production design changes with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, and the production pattern changes with the end of the variable display of the special pattern. stops. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, the result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of the performance symbols.

In addition, in the special figure variation production, in addition to the variable display of production symbols, various displays such as the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, normal button 40, special button 41, etc. It is possible to perform other performances using similar performance equipment. In this case, even after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue performing other performances.

4-2-1. Effect pattern display area On the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle performance symbol area 50b2, and a right performance symbol area 50b3. The left performance symbol area 50b1 is an area where the left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance. Similarly, the middle performance symbol area 50b2 and the right performance symbol region 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle performance symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display screen 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area where the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are composed of numerical symbols 1 to 9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left presentation pattern area 50b1. , the middle effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are described to represent the range, and are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special symbols starts, for example, as shown in FIG. , EZ2, EZ3" (also referred to as "production pattern EZ") are displayed in a stopped state, and the left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are also stopped and displayed, and the special pattern is variablely displayed. As shown in FIG. 19(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 starts, and the small symbols Variable display of KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. Note that "↓" in FIG. 19 indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation", the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are different, as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1). After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called flop) that suggests a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that indicate a loss, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the left and right symbols are not the same. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), and reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continued, and a reach effect is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. Note that the stopping order and stopping manner of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established in the normal variation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In N reach, as shown in FIG. 20(A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 20(B), the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol EZ2 gradually changes. It slows down. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a miss in the reach. There are a plurality of types of stopping patterns that suggest a miss in the reach, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the inner symbol is different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", the game will stop in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot, as shown in Figure 20 (C-2). indicate. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that suggest a jackpot, such as "7.7.7" and "2.2.2", in which the symbols in the left and right middles are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. In addition, the performance content of N reach is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium performance symbol EZ2, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 representing that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP reach-only performance (for example, a battle performance) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only production is reached, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation", the display screen will be displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (C-1). At 50a, a production that suggests a jackpot (for example, a display in which the main character is happy after winning the battle) is performed, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double eye). indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in Figure 19 (C-2), there will be an effect that suggests a loss (for example, an enemy character enters the battle). At the same time, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss of reach. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. Note that the contents of the SP reach performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach will be stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation level, winning expectation level) will be explained in detail. The jackpot expectation level for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the jackpot determination result. For example, if the execution probability of N Reach is 10% when the jackpot determination result is "Lose" and 100% when the jackpot determination result is "Jackpot", the execution probability of SP Reach is If the result of the jackpot judgment is "Lose", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is "Jackpot", it is set to 100%, then the jackpot expectation of SP reach is higher than the jackpot expectation of N reach. It is possible to set it higher. In addition, SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP Reach, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and if the result of the Jackpot determination is "Lose", the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2%. If the probability of executing SP Reach B is set to 20% in the case of , the execution probability of SP Reach B will be set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose". For example, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach B higher than the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach A. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level.

4-3. Pending Icon Display Area The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The reservation icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. It is possible to display the hold icon HA in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "2", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and A hold icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22(A), an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area can be provided near the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA, which is the same as or different from the pending icon HA, in response to the start of the special figure variation effect.

Note that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the reservation icon display area 50d can be used as a display area that displays both the number of special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, or can be used as a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Hold Performance Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform hold performance in response to a game ball entering the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The reservation performance can notify the player of the number of special symbols 1 or 2 reserved.

In the hold effect, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 when the special figure 1 hold count is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and for example, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting slot 11 during the special figure variation performance, as shown in FIG. 22(C), the first display area 50d1 and the second display area of the reserved icon display area 50d A hold icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is informed that the number of special drawings 1 held is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is finished and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22(D), the hold icon displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Preview Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special figure variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the buttons 40, 41, etc., and includes the results of jackpot determination and special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to suggest the results of

4-4-1. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as a preview performance. The movable body performance is a performance that operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the movable object performance, for example, when N reach progresses to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap with the display screen 50a as seen from the player, leading to SP reach. At this time, an effect image is displayed on the display screen 50a in a space that does not overlap with the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body performance is not limited to suggesting the development of SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-2. Operation performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation performance using the normal button 40 and special button 41 as a preview performance. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the operation performance, for example, in SP reach, a period (button operation validity period) occurs during which the press operation of the special button 41 is valid, and with the occurrence of this button operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 24 (A) , a performance that prompts the user to operate the special button 41 (button operation promotion performance) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The button operation promotion image G3 includes an image imitating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (press operation image G32) representing the operation mode of the special button 41 (that is, a press operation), and a button operation valid period. An image representing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33). Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period has elapsed without any special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 24(B). As shown in , the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and as seen from the player, the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display screen 50a, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the operation performance is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Pre-read performance The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a pre-read performance for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, as a preview effect. The pre-reading performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the special symbol 1 reservation or the special symbol 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead performance, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the special drawing 1 hold is a "jackpot", the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as ``○'', in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 22(C). may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "lost", the hold icon HA may be displayed as "☆" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the change is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and changes or additions can be made as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to change the stopping manner of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol variation performance.

5. Display on 7-segment display Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) will be described. On the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio between the total number of normal prize balls won by the player in the normal gaming state and the normal number of balls fired by the player in the normal gaming state, is displayed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. Note that the 7-segment display 300 displays bases other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, and jackpot game). The jackpot base, which is the ratio between the total number of jackpot balls won by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of jackpot balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state, is never displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to always count the number of normally fired balls, the total number of normally prized balls, and the total number of fired balls. The total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor. The number of normally fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of normal prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out by the game control microcomputer 101 in the normal gaming state.

The information on the number of normally fired balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 (FIG. (see) is stored in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normally fired balls, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are maintained (not deleted). In this way, even if the RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the normal number of balls fired at the time of power cutoff and the normal total prize ball number at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value on the 7-segment display 300 regardless of the gaming state (in the normal gaming state, jackpot gaming state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of fired balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 becomes the first normal base. Thereafter, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 60,001 shots, the value that was the first normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated when the total number of fired balls increases from 60,001 to 120,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 120,001 shots, the value that was the normal base of the previous round will be stored as the normal base of the second round, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base of the previous round. Ru. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 120,001 to 180,000 becomes the current normal base.

After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 180,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 1 time ago will be stored as the normal base 2 times ago. The value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 240,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 3 times ago will be deleted, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago. The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times before, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 240,001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is similarly calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the normal base values up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104. You can leave it there. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the current normal base ⇒ 1 previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 on the 7-segment display 300. The display is changed every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340), the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value shown in the right two digits (normal base) is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the current normal base display started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b1" in the left two digits, and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the previous normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 will display "b2" in the left two digits, and the two previous normal base will be displayed in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base two times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the display of the previous two normal bases started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits, and the three previous normal bases in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base three times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal base display three times before, on the 7-segment display 300, as described above, the left two digits indicate "bL" and the right two digits indicate the current state. The normal base of is displayed and the same is repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, in the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the two digits on the right. That is, when the total number of fired balls is 300 balls or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and after the total number of fired balls exceeds 300 balls, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less, the value of the denominator of the normal base (the number of balls normally fired) is too small, thereby avoiding displaying the unreliable value of the normal base. There is. In addition, even if the total number of fired balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of balls normally fired is 6000 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory, the two digits on the left will indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3". ' will start blinking. Thereafter, when the number of normally fired balls exceeds 6000 balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL" indicated by the two digits on the left becomes a lighting mode. When the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 or more after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory, "b1" indicated by the two digits on the left becomes lit, and the total number of balls fired since the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory is When the number reaches 120,000 or more, "b2" indicated by the two digits on the left lights up, and when the total number of balls fired reaches 120,000 or more after the power is turned on for the first time after shipping from the factory, "b3" indicated by the two digits on the left lights up. " will be lit. In this way, when the two digits on the left flash to a person who is checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300, the normal base value shown on the two digits on the right has not yet converged sufficiently. It is possible to make the user understand that the value is not present. In other words, if you show the lighting mode in the two digits on the left to someone who is checking the normal base, they will understand that the normal base value shown in the two digits on the right is a value that has converged to some extent. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. In this way, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the normal base display starts. As described above, when transitioning to the setting mode after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting change mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting parts LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on, thereby indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

6. Over-winning ball prevention function Next, the over-winning ball prevention function will be explained. In this pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of operating an excessive prize ball prevention function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prize ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unplayable on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 (standard number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player obtains (is paid out to the player) in all gaming states (normal playing state, jackpot playing state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) It is. Note that the total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but does not mean the total number of prize balls that are actually paid out to the player. It's okay. As mentioned above, the total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize pitch number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of fired balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. The total number of balls fired is stored in the storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of balls fired from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is The difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the RAM 104.

Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-erasable storage section 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of fired balls at the time of power cutoff. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to treat the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of balls fired is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 32), but also fires the game ball. The firing control process (the process of step 109 described later, see FIG. 32) for the purpose of this is also stopped. Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball is not shot, and the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played. In addition, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and stops receiving signals according to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and the display devices 8 and 7 segments The display control of the display 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170.

After the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which the game cannot be executed continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is canceled on the condition that RAM clear is executed. That is, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the gaming hall shuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193. Then, when turning on the power by turning on the power switch 193, the employee of the gaming hall depresses the RAM clear switch 191. Thereby, by executing RAM clear, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and firing control process regarding the game. In this way, in this embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be restarted simply by turning the power off and on (re-on), but the game can be restarted only by clearing the RAM. can.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function operates will be explained based on FIG. 25. The over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the player shifts from an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not necessarily operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high probability high base state after a jackpot game or a low probability high base state after a jackpot game.

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 25(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 25(B). At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of transitioning from this jackpot game state to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25(C), at the timing of transition from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the high probability high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing when the advantageous game state ends for the player. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the information on the difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, and the difference number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls will not be reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine PY1, even during business hours, there are situations where the power is turned off and turned on (re-on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, malfunctions, severe fraud, etc. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the purpose of providing the over-prize ball prevention function will be lost. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or severe fraud occurs, there is a risk that the player who restarts the game afterward will be given an unfair advantage by making it difficult for the over-prize ball prevention function to operate. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned unfair advantage from being given to the player, the difference number of balls is not reset by turning the power back on or executing RAM clearing.

Next, the conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset will be explained based on FIG. 26. In this embodiment, there are two reset conditions for resetting the difference number of balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 26(A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. do. Note that when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage section 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a are also reset (cleared). The information on the total number of fired balls stored in the fired ball number storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter this will simply be referred to as "the difference number of balls is reset (cleared)". Although FIG. 26A shows a case in which the number of differential balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed while waiting for a customer, it does not matter in which gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference number of balls is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 26(A). In other words, if the game is not played for an hour after entering the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 will delete the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. clear. Note that the customer waiting state is a gaming state in which no game is executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26(A) and 26(B), assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in a jackpot game state due to a game played by a certain player. Thereafter, when a certain player transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the high-probability-high-base state and then to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the player has finished playing the game. In this case, for the player who starts the next game, if the number of difference balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000), the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the number of differential balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. Thereby, an employee of the gaming parlor can press the special reset switch 181 at any timing after a certain player finishes playing the game to reset the number of difference balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference in the number of balls is automatically reset. Thereby, the difference in the number of balls can be reset without placing a burden on the employees of the game parlor. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player who starts the game from having the excessive prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting the game, which would put him at a huge disadvantage. It is possible.

Next, the production mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on FIG. 27(A). When the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 27(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and "Error An error cancellation method image ERX showing the error is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) is canceled when RAM clear is executed, but it continues as it is only by turning the power back on.

Here, a description will be given of a case in which illegal magnetism is detected in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal according to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the firing control process related to the game, similarly to when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be executed due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes game control processing and firing control processing regarding the game by turning the power off and on (returning the power on). can do.

Next, the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 27(B). When an illegal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. An error release method image ER1 indicating "Please do so" is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, if we compare the performance mode when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (see Figure 27 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see Figure 27 (B)), we can see how to cancel it. Everything other than the image is the same. Therefore, it is necessary to make employees or players at the gaming parlor aware that they are in a situation where they cannot play the game both when illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to make it easier.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 70000 (pre-standard number, specific number) will be explained based on FIG. 28(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A). First, as shown in FIG. 28(A), on the display screen 50a, a round effect is being executed in which a round image G109, a prize ball number image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and at the bottom of the display screen 50a, an over-prize ball error indicating "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left" is displayed. A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible to let the player understand the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching activation (the situation where the difference in the number of balls is approaching 80,000). be. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. It should be noted that the over-prize ball preview image KY may be configured to show the remaining difference ball number until reaching 80,000 at any time, and may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 (reference number) will be explained based on FIG. 28(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B). As shown in FIG. 28(B), on the display screen 50a, a round effect is being executed in which a round image G109, a prize pitch number image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed. When the number of differential balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop notice indicating that "the game will be stopped when the high base state ends" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. Image KH is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends. The display of this game stop notice image KH corresponds to a "game-disabled notice effect".

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 or more, the game stop notice image KH shown in FIG. Then, a notice is given that the game will no longer be playable. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize in advance that the game is in a situation where it becomes impossible to play the game, and also to know in advance when the game will become impossible to play. As a result, even if the game suddenly becomes impossible to play when the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state ends, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 or more, an over-prize ball preview image KY (see FIG. 28(A)) is displayed, which foretells that the game is about to become impossible. be done. Thereafter, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, a game stop notice image KH (see FIG. 28(B)) is displayed, which foretells that the game cannot be played. In this way, it is possible for the player to understand in advance the situation in which the game becomes impossible, step by step, so that the player can easily understand the current situation.

Here, after the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A), the presentation mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 29(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 29(A), on the display screen 50a, a probability variation mode production in which a probability variation background image G105 is displayed is being executed, and the production pattern EZ is being displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple border image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000 and that the over-prize ball prevention function is about to operate.

Further, after the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B), the production mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 29(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 29(B), on the display screen 50a, a probability variation mode production in which a probability variation background image G105 is displayed is being executed, and the production pattern EZ is being displayed in a variable manner. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This red border image EFb allows the player to play while being aware of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 and the high base state ends. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(A), a presentation mode will be described when the number of difference balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, a situation arises in which an employee of the gaming hall opens the front door 23 to the outer frame 22 and presses the special reset switch 181. Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error release method image ER2 showing "Error 2 Please close the front door" is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a performance mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display screen 50a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30(B), a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

7. Operation of the game control microcomputer 101 [Main control main processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 31 to 47. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 101 are provided in the gaming RAM 104. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the main control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 31 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, a power-on processing is first performed (step S001).

In the power-on process (S001), for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, gaming CPU 102 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management) settings, and when power is restored. Performs initial settings such as setting the work area of the gaming RAM 104 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the power-on process (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the gaming control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clearing when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clearing switch 191 is input. When RAM clearing is executed, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, information on the number of reserved special drawings, jackpot determination results, etc.) stored in the gaming RAM 104 is erased. However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

In this power-on process (S001), a game stop flag, which will be described later, is switched to OFF when RAM clear is executed while it is ON. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed while the game stop flag is ON, it remains ON. In other words, the state of the game stop flag does not change just by turning the power back on. In this way, after the game stop flag is turned ON due to the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not RAM clear is executed.

Following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, it is executed at a period of 4 msec, for example. After the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) starts, various counters are updated by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003). The value update process is executed repeatedly.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 32, in the main side timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unplayable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), then input processing to be described later is executed (S102).

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S103). The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. Subsequently, sensor detection processing is executed (S104).

In the sensor detection process (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole sensor processing, specific area Sensor processing and discharge port sensor processing are performed sequentially. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol retention storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A second starting port sensor command including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the discharge port sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge port sensor.

After the sensor detection process (S104) shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal operation process (S105). In the normal operation process (S105), a normal symbol standby process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol confirmation process, and an auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 106. In addition, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a normal pattern variation start command including information regarding the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern is generated. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, the general pattern display 82 starts variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result in response to the elapse of the ordinary symbol fluctuation time after the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol that is being executed. Then, a general pattern variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern is generated.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process, when a predetermined stopping time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol being executed starts, the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. In addition, an auxiliary game control command is generated according to the result of the processing.

After the normal operation process (S105) shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a difference ball number measurement process (S106), which will be described later, and a special operation process (S107), which will be described later. Subsequently, a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is executed (S108).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls (S109). That is, by executing the firing control process (S109), the player can fire the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the firing control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be fired even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process for controlling the display on the 7-segment display 300 (S110). Next, error processing is executed to determine an error due to magnetic detection (fraud), an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, etc. (S111). In error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error process (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes an output process to be described later (S112). Subsequently, other processing is executed (S113). As other processing (S113), for example, based on the number of special symbols on hold, the special symbol on hold display 83 is controlled in a display mode that shows the number, a timer is updated, etc.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process when the power is cut off (S114), and ends this process. In the power outage monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it will update game information, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, access to the gaming RAM 104 is prohibited.

[Input processing] As shown in FIG. 33, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201) If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erasing clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and number of difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erasing clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erasing storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of fired balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300, as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a. In step S204, other processing is executed and the present processing ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 34, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, a total prize ball count process is executed to count the total number of prize balls paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6). In addition, in the difference ball number calculation process (S303), the game control microcomputer 101 sends a difference ball number command including information on the calculated difference ball number to the performance control board 120, and the performance control microcomputer 121 calculates the difference ball number. The numbers may be grasped sequentially.

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notification flag is OFF. The over-prized ball notice flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned on (S306), and the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the super prize ball preview command is sent to the performance control board 120, the purple edge image EFa and the super prize ball preview image KY are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned ON (S310). Then, an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the performance control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 28(B).

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 35, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing regarding the special figure display 81 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 14D, second grand prize device 15D) is divided into four stages. "Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and when the "special operation status" is "2". If (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305) , Special symbol confirmation processing (S1306) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, and S1305 are NO), special electric accessory processing (S1307) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 36, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2) is "0" or not. is determined (S1401). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting slot 12, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 11 (namely, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the first starting slot 11, the customer It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the vehicle is in a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process to be described later is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 12 (the reserved information of special drawing 2 ), when there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403), which will be described later, are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the first reservation in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b. Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special pattern 2 variation start command) set in the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special pattern stop pattern data set in the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Also, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information for special drawing 2, but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0". If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the 1 starting slot 11 (pending information of the special figure 1), the later-described special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the fourth reservation in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. Clear the storage area (the storage area furthest from the side from which the data is read) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON or not, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state continues. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared by turning on the power again, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Customer waiting measurement process] As shown in FIG. 37, in the customer waiting measurement process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increase process is executed to increase the value of the customer waiting counter (S1420). Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Next, it is determined whether the customer waiting state continues for more than one hour. If it is determined that the process is not continuing (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process continues (YES in S1421), a non-erasing clear process is executed (S1422), similar to the process in step S202 described above (see FIG. 33). As a result, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c are stored. The information on the number of balls that are currently in play will be cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this processing is completed. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the production control board 120, the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 30(B).

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] The special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) are based on FIG. 38 because the processing flow is the same. I will explain them all together. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), first, a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) is read out as a determination value (S1501). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), it is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the second reserved special figure). Read out the special symbol random number. In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the value is stored in the first storage area of the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a of the gaming RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the first special figure pending). Read out the special pattern random number.

Next, a jackpot determination table (FIG. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1503). If it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1503), that is, if it is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state), the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "1219"), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (S1504). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1503), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "2499") among the jackpot judgment tables (Fig. 12 (A)). It is determined whether or not (S1505).

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "jackpot", the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12(B) (S1506). After determining the jackpot type (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S1508). finish. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1504, S1505) is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set (S1508) and the process ends.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process)] The special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) and the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) have the same processing flow. This will be explained together based on FIGS. 39 and 40. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409), it is first determined whether the gaming state is in a time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not). (S1601)

If it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S1601), that is, in a non-time-saving state, it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1602). If it is ON (YES in S1602), refer to the normal jackpot table in the non-time-saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state and jackpot in the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 13 or 14), and select the special drawing. A special figure fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number (S1603).

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is not ON, it is determined whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (S1604). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(C), the reach establishment random number value is "0" to "29" in the non-time saving state, and is "0" to "9" in the time saving state. In other words, it is harder to reach when you lose in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the processing speed of special drawing reservations by allowing more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times to be selected in the time-saving state.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (YES in S1604), that is, in the case of reach and loss, the reach and reach loss table in the non-time saving state (one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14) A special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1605).

On the other hand, if the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (NO in S1604), that is, in the case of a no-reach loss, the reach-no-reach loss table during the non-time saving state (the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14). Of these, a special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S1606). When there is no reach, a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls held. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", the special symbol has a shorter special symbol fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2". A variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13 or 14).

In addition, in step S1601, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the time-saving state (YES in S1601), as shown in FIG. Processing (S1607 to S1611) is performed in the same flow as steps S1602 to S1606 described above except for setting the part corresponding to the time saving state in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 14.

That is, if it is a jackpot, the special pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to the jackpot (S1608). Moreover, if it is a loss with a reach, a special pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a loss with a reach. In addition, if it is a no-reach loss, a special pattern variation pattern is selected based on the special pattern variation pattern random number with reference to the part in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and corresponding to a no-reach loss (S1611).

After selecting the special figure variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 39, the selected special figure variation pattern is set (S1612) and this process is finished. Information on the special symbol variation pattern set in step S1612 is included in the variation start command set in step S1406 or S1412 in the special symbol standby process (S1302), and is sent to the production control board 120 in the output process (S112). .

[Special symbol fluctuation processing] As shown in FIG. 41, in the special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304), first, the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) , see FIG. 13 or 14) has elapsed (S1801). If the time has not passed (NO in S1801), this process ends immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1801), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1802), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols at a symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) according to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1804), this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation process] As shown in FIG. 42, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), first, the stop time of the special symbol (the stop time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not passed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process to be described later is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern (see FIG. 16 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data according to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the control is performed in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the special operation status is set to "1" (S1909) to end the process, in order to not start the jackpot game.

[Game state management process] As shown in FIG. 43, in the game state management process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), decrease the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state by 1 (S2002), and check whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not. Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2004) and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time-saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" or not. (S2007) If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008) and the process advances to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process advances to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process advances to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010) and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute.

In step S2011, a game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is sent to the production control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 27(A). Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

In step S2012, a gaming state designation command including information on the current gaming state (information on whether the probability change flag and time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)] The special electric accessory processing is a process for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 44, in the special electric accessory processing (S1307), it is first determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2701). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 14D, second jackpot device 15D) have been completed in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2701), whether or not the grand prize openings (first grand prize opening, second grand prize opening 15) are open (that is, the first grand prize device 14D or the second grand prize opening It is determined whether the device 15D is being opened (S2702). If it is not open (NO in S2702), whether or not the time has come to open the big winning opening, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time has come to start opening the first big winning opening 14; Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening (S2703).

If the determination result in step S2703 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2703 is YES, it is determined whether the currently executing jackpot game is a jackpot game based on the V long jackpot (see FIG. 16) (S2704). If it is not a V long jackpot (NO in S2704), the process proceeds to step S2707, but if it is a V long jackpot (YES in S2704), whether or not it is the timing to start the 10th R that allows passage to specific area 16. Determine (S2705). If it is not the timing to start the 10th R (NO in S2705), the process directly advances to step S2707. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 10th R (YES in S2705), V valid period setting processing is performed (S2706).

In the V validity period setting process (S2706), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a during the opening of the second grand prize opening 15 in the 10th round of the V long jackpot and for several seconds after the second grand prize opening 15 is closed. is set to the V validity period that is determined to be valid. Note that in this embodiment, a period other than this (including when a jackpot game is not executed) is set as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, determining that the detection of a game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2707, the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) are opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 16) depending on the type of jackpot. Note that the distribution member 16k always moves in a constant motion from the start of the first round of the round game. In the opening pattern of the V long jackpot, in the 10th round, the AT opening/closing member 14k is opened so that the game ball won in the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with a margin. On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the V short jackpot, in the 10th round, the distribution member 16k operates so that even if the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, it cannot pass through the specific area 16. The opening timing of the AT opening/closing member 14k relative to the opening/closing member 14k is set.

Subsequently, in step S2708, round designation command transmission determination processing is performed, and the present processing ends. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2708), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) in step S2703 is the first opening in one round game. If so, a round designation command including information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, in this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. Therefore, in this step S2708, the round designation command is always set.

In step S2702 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 14, second grand prize opening 15) is being opened, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the grand prize opening are satisfied. (S2709). In this form, the closing condition is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (10 pieces per 1 round in this form), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 16) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big prize opening is not satisfied (NO in S2709), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) are satisfied (YES in S2709), the big winning opening is closed (blocked). S2710). Then, it is determined whether one round game (round interval) has ended (S2711). If it has not ended (NO in S2711), the process ends. On the other hand, when the round game ends (YES in S2711), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2712), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2713). If it is not "0" (NO in S2713), the process ends as it is in order to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2713), a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot ending processing to end the jackpot game (S2714), and the jackpot ending is started (S2715). Then, a jackpot end flag is set (S2716) and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2701 (YES in S2701), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the ending time of the jackpot game has elapsed (S2717), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2717), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2717), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2718). Then, a game state setting process to be described later is performed (S2719). Subsequently, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2720). Subsequently, the special operation status is set to "1" (S2721), and this processing ends.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 45, in the game state setting process (S2719), it is first determined whether the V flag is ON (whether a V prize has been won during the V validity period) (S2801). If it is ON (YES in S2801), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2802), and the time saving flag is turned ON (S2803). As a result, the game is controlled to be in a highly accurate and high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the probability change counter is set to "160" (S2804), the time saving counter is set to "160" (S2805), and the process advances to step S2808. As a result, the system is controlled to a high-accuracy, high-base state in which the ST number is 160 times and the time saving number is 160 times.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the V flag is not ON (NO in S2801), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2806). That is, at this time, the probability change flag is not turned on. As a result, the game is controlled to a low-probability-high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2807), and the process advances to step S2808. That is, this results in control to a low-accuracy, high-base state in which the number of times of time saving is 100.

In step S2808, the gaming control microcomputer 101 specifies the gaming state including information on the gaming state just set (ON or OFF of the probability variation flag, ON or OFF of the time saving flag, information on the value of the probability variation counter, and the value of the time saving counter). The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In this way, the gaming state setting process (S2719) ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 46, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processing are output to the production control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer edge signal output processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the outer edge signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process advances to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize ball notice (S3102), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize ball notice") is output to the main control board 100. The information is sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for announcing the winning ball to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall who monitors the hall computer is made aware of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated if the number of differential balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000) in this pachinko gaming machine PY1. is possible.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize balls (S3104), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of differential balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize balls") is output from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for super prize ball preview to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall monitoring the hall computer noticed that the number of differential balls in this pachinko machine PY1 had reached 80,000, and the game was executed when the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy low base state ended. It is possible to understand the situation in which it becomes impossible.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), the game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output processing (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-winning ball prevention function is output as the main It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the game cannot be played due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function in this pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-erasing clear process shown in step S203 or the non-erasing clear process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the total number of fired balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c. It is determined whether or not the information on the number of differential balls present has been cleared. If the non-erasure clearing process is not being executed (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erasing clear process is being executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process advances to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of differential balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is transmitted from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. and is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the reset outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the number of differential balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In addition, a dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an outer end signal for super prize ball notice, an outer end signal for super prize ball, and an outer end signal for stopping the game are transmitted. , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

8. Operation of the production control microcomputer 121 Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 121 will be explained based on FIGS. 48 to 50. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[Sub-control main processing] When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 48 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, power-on processing is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for performance determination regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update processing is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process (S4004), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display screen 50a (performs various effects using the image) in accordance with the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various sound productions using audio), and performs lamp control. Through the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light (to perform various light emitting effects by emitting light), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are actuated (to perform various movable body effects by movement). do) In this way, various performances (fluctuating performances, hold performances, movable body performances, operation performances, look-ahead performances, other preview performances, opening performances accompanying special games, open game performances, ending performances, customer waiting performances, performance modes) control, etc.) is realized.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S112) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt process] The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec period is input to the production control board 120. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 49, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In input processing (S4101), operations on operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a, special button detection switch 41a, and select button detection switch, are detected, and commands are set or effects are performed according to the detection results. create data for use. In the light emission data output process (S4102), the frame lamp 53 and In order to cause a lamp such as the board lamp 54 to emit light, light emission data (lamp data) is referred to. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the light emission data. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable body control process (S4103), the movable units 55, 56, and 58 are operated at predetermined timings based on the production data created in the input process (S4101), production data creation process (S4204), etc. described later. Refer to the drive data to perform the moving object performance. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the drive data. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 operates the movable devices 55, 56, 58 in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process (S4104), the watchdog timer is reset.

[10ms timer interrupt process] The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012), as shown in FIG. 50, received command analysis process (S4201), effect timer update process (S4202), audio control process (S4203), and effect data creation process (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process (S4201), the command stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command (for example, effect selection, effect mode setting, command set, etc.). In the effect timer update process (S4202), a timer for measuring time related to each effect is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process (S4202), the start timing and end timing of the valid operation period of the operation units such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process (S4203), based on the processing results of the input process (S4101) and the received command analysis process (S4201), audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and the audio control circuit 161 control is performed. In the performance data creation process (S4204), performance data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process (S4201).

Here, an example of processing when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that a variation start command has been received in the received command analysis process (S4201), the production control microcomputer 121 performs variation based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the command as a process when receiving the variation start command. A production pattern (sub variation pattern) of the production is selected, information on the sub variation pattern is set, and a variation production start command including information on the sub variation pattern is set in the output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern that performs SP reach, and use the variation production start command corresponding to that sub variation pattern. set in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub fluctuation pattern. A fluctuating performance is realized. The processing flow for realizing such performances is basically the same for other performances such as performances associated with special games, customer waiting performances, look-ahead performances, so-called preview performances accompanying such fluctuations, and control of performance modes. It's the same.

9. Operation Attention-Calling Performance Next, the operation attention-calling performance will be explained. In this pachinko game machine PY1, if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated or if illegal magnetism is detected (if a predetermined stop condition is met), the game becomes impossible to play. In other words, the game control process and the firing control process are stopped. At this time, even though the game cannot be played, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the situation and may continue to rotate the handle 72k (firing operation means). Therefore, in this embodiment, after the game becomes impossible to play, an operation alert effect is executed to call attention to stopping the shooting of game balls based on the player's rotation operation on the handle 72k. ing. This operation alert performance makes it possible to prevent the player from firing useless balls.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a case where an operation attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) is executed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. First, as a precondition, it is assumed that the player has not performed any rotational operation on the handle 72k and that the excessive prize ball prevention function has been activated. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the game stop notification command (see S2011) from the game control microcomputer 101, and thereby grasps that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX on the display screen 50a, and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52, as shown in FIG. 51(A). Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the panel lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player performs a rotation operation on the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). As a result, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the operation attention-calling performance while the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 51(B). do. That is, an operation alert image HT indicating "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. This operation attention-calling performance can make the player more aware that he is not in a situation where he should shoot the game ball.

Thereafter, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 no longer receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 51(C). In this manner, in this embodiment, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the operation attention-calling performance is executed only while the player is performing a rotation operation on the handle 72k.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a case where an operation attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) is executed after illegal magnetism is detected. First, as a precondition, it is assumed that the player has not performed a rotation operation on the handle 72k and that an illegal magnetism is detected. In this case, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a magnetism detection command indicating that an illegal magnetism has been detected from the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the production control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error release method image ER1 on the display screen 50a, and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52, as shown in FIG. 52(A). . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the panel lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player performs a rotation operation on the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). As a result, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the operation attention-calling performance while the red background image RE and the error release method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 52(B). do. That is, the operation alert image HT indicating "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. With this operation attention-calling performance, it is possible to make the player more strongly aware that he is not in a situation where he should shoot the game ball.

Thereafter, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 no longer receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 52(C). In this manner, in the present embodiment, after the illegal magnetism is detected, the operation alert performance is executed only while the player is performing a rotation operation on the handle 72k.

10. Effects of the present embodiment As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy low base state ends, the game is executed. becomes incapable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, and there is no particular disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine PY1 that allows the player to stop playing at a timing when it is easy to stop the game and does not award excessive prize balls.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the high base state ends. In other words, after transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of fired balls increases, and a situation where the difference in number of balls becomes less than 80,000 can be assumed. Therefore, in order to prevent the above situation from occurring, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, and a player who plays the game later starts playing immediately, if the difference in number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, a serious problem occurs. A situation arises. Therefore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the measured number of differential balls is reset based on the establishment of the reset condition that is not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, the difference number of balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, when an employee of the game parlor presses down the RAM clear switch 191 when turning on the power, game information (for example, information on the game state such as a high probability state, the number of special symbols on hold, etc.) (and information such as the jackpot determination result) is deleted, while the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c is not deleted. Therefore, even in a situation where game information must be deleted due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the measured number of difference balls from being deleted.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even if RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls is not erased. However, by pressing the special reset switch 181 by an employee of the gaming hall, the measured number of difference balls can be erased. In this way, an employee of the gaming hall can erase the measured difference in the number of balls at any timing.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls exceeds 80,000, a game stop notice is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. Image KH is displayed. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the game will become impossible to play, and can prevent a situation where the player suddenly becomes unable to play the game and becomes confused. In particular, the game stop notice image KH, as shown in FIG. 28(B), indicates that the game will no longer be playable when the high base state ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately know when the game will be played.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the difference in the number of balls being 80,000 or more. At this time, if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball will not be fired because the firing control process (S109) is stopped, but an operation alert effect will be executed as shown in FIG. 51(B). Ru. That is, the operation alert image HT is displayed on the display screen 50a, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel," and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. This allows the player to more reliably understand that the game cannot be played.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, if illegal magnetism is detected, the game becomes impossible to execute. At this time, if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball will not be fired because the firing control process (S109) is stopped, but an operation alert effect will be executed as shown in FIG. 52(B). Ru. That is, the operation alert image HT is displayed on the display screen 50a, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel," and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. This allows the player to more reliably understand that the game cannot be played.

11. Example of change Below, an example of change will be explained. In addition, in the description of the modification example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Further, the technical features in the above embodiments and the modified examples described below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<First modification example>
The above embodiment is configured as a gaming machine (type 1 gaming machine) in which a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. On the other hand, the first modified example is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixer. That is, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the big prize opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds. In this case, when the game ball that enters the big winning hole by executing the small winning game passes through a specific area in the big winning hole, the big winning game (type 2 big winning game) is executed. In this way, in the first modification, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. It is configured as a gaming machine (mixing machine of 1 type and 2 types) that executes the following.

In addition, in the first modification, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, as long as you play correctly, a type 2 jackpot game will be executed (the game ball can pass through a specific area). ). In other words, winning a small win in the special drawing 2 lottery means executing a jackpot game. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, when transitioning from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4 (predetermined number). It is assumed that the special drawing 2 drawing is executed with priority over the special drawing 1 drawing, and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the special drawing 1 drawing. In this case, when the state shifts from the high base state to the normal game state, the lottery of special drawing 2 will be executed four times, and the player is still in a situation where it is easy to execute a jackpot game. Therefore, even after the transition to the normal gaming state, until the special drawing 2 lottery is no longer executed, it can be said to be an advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) in which it is easy for the player to execute a jackpot game.

In this first modification, it is assumed that, as described above, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated when the normal gaming state is entered. In this case, even though the player is in a normal gaming state and is still in a situation (advantageous period) in which it is easy to play a jackpot game, he suddenly becomes unable to play the game. Therefore, in this first modified example, as shown in FIG. When all the remaining balls (remaining in Figure 2) are consumed, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In other words, when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up (when all the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the remaining 2 special symbols are completed), the game is made impossible to execute.

In this way, even if the player shifts to the normal gaming state after the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, he or she can continue playing until the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) in which it is easy to win type 2 jackpot games ends. It is possible to do so. In addition, in the first modification, the lottery for special map 2 is performed with priority over the lottery for special map 1, but the lottery for special map 1 is executed with priority over the lottery for special map 2. , the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery may be executed in the order in which game balls enter the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12.

Next, in the first modification, the performance after transitioning from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal gaming state will be explained. If there is a special figure 2 remaining pending when the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the remaining reserved special effect shown in FIG. 54 is executed until the special figure 2 remaining pending is completely exhausted. This remaining reservation special performance is a performance that suggests whether or not you have won a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, and it is not executed in a high base state, but is executed in the special drawing 1 lottery. It's a flawless performance. In other words, the remaining reservation special performance (advantageous performance) is limited to the period from the transition to the normal gaming state until all the special symbol 2 remaining reservations are used up (until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 4 times) ), this is a special performance that indicates a chance to win a type 2 jackpot game.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when transitioning from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal gaming state, the remaining number of chances image LA indicating "last 4 times" is displayed on the display screen 50a. is displayed. This makes the player aware that he/she still has four chances to win the type 2 jackpot game. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(A), on the display screen 50a, the transformation is performed in a state where a reach mode is formed by the left effect pattern EZ1 indicating "5" and the right effect pattern EZ3 indicating "5". A main character appearance image BA1 in which the main character appears is displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen 50a, a remaining variation number image LB indicating "4 times remaining" is displayed, indicating how many times the variation display of the second special symbol will be executed remaining.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a special battle image BA2 showing a battle between the transformed main character and the enemy character is displayed. After that, if you win a small win or a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, as shown in Figure 54 (D-1), a special battle victory image WI showing that the transformed main character has won against the enemy character will be displayed. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the small performance symbol KZ that has been variably displayed at the upper left of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed in the winning mode "555" which is a double number. In this way, the player who sees the special battle winning image WI and the small effect pattern KZ of doubles can be made to understand that he or she has won a small hit or a jackpot. Thereafter, if the player has won a small win, by passing the game ball through a specific area during the execution of the small win game, the second type jackpot game can be won. Furthermore, if the player has won a jackpot, he or she can win a type 1 jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the lottery for special drawing 2 is a loss, a special battle defeat image LO is displayed showing that the transformed main character has been defeated by the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 54 (D-2). Also, at this time, the small performance symbol KZ that has been being displayed in a variable manner at the upper left of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed at "545", which is a reach miss. In this way, it is possible for the player who sees the special battle winning image WI and the small effect pattern KZ of the reach losing eye to understand that he has lost. In this way, if the lottery for special drawing 2 is a loss, the remaining reservation special effect shown in FIG. 54 is repeatedly executed until all the remaining reservations for special drawing 2 are exhausted. Then, if all the results of the special drawing 2 lottery are loses, the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) ends. Thereafter, in the normal game state, the remaining reservation special performance is not executed, and the variable performance based on the lottery of special drawing 1 is executed.

In this first modification, when the difference in the number of balls is less than 80,000, during the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) from the transition to the normal gaming state until the special symbol 2 remaining reservation is exhausted, The remaining reservation special effect shown in is executed. On the other hand, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, during the advantageous period from the transition to the normal gaming state until all the remaining reserved special symbols 2 are used up (see Figure 53), the remaining reserved special shown in Figure 54 The performance is executed. In this way, after transitioning to the normal gaming state, as long as the remaining reservation special performance indicating that the situation is advantageous to the player continues, the over-prize ball prevention function will not operate. Therefore, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, it is possible for the player to enjoy the remaining reservation special performance after transitioning to the normal gaming state. In other words, even if the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, the remaining pending special performance that was in place before the game became unplayable is executed as is, and the timing when the game becomes unplayable and the remaining pending special effect are changed. It is possible to match the end timing of the performance.

<Second modification example>
In the above embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 or more, an accompanying effect is executed by, for example, displaying a red border image EFb or a game stop notice image KH (see FIG. 28(B)). . However, even if the difference in the number of balls exceeded 80,000, the performance itself was not replaced and executed. On the other hand, in the second modification, when the situation changes from a situation where the number of difference balls is less than 80,000 to a situation where the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the performance itself is replaced and executed. In this second modified example, like the first modified example, it is assumed that the mixer is configured as a one-type, two-type mixer. The performance of the second modified example will be explained by taking as an example a case where the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 53.

As a precondition, a jackpot game is executed in a situation where the difference in the number of balls is less than 80,000. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a. That is, on the display screen 50a, a round image G109, a prize ball number image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 sends an over-prize ball notification command (see step S312) to the production control microcomputer 121, and the production control microcomputer 121 grasps the situation where the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. do. Thereby, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the round alternative performance shown in FIG. 55(B).

Specifically, in the round alternative performance, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the round background image G114 representing a town is switched to the round alternative background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building. Then, a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed superimposed on the round substitute background image G116, and a game stop notice image KI indicating that "the game is stopped when the advantageous period ends" is displayed. Furthermore, a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" is displayed on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention.

In this way, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, a round alternative performance is executed in which the performance mode is significantly changed from the round performance, making it possible to make the player more aware of the situation where the game cannot be played. It is. That is, for players who do not fully understand the over-prize ball prevention function, even if the red border image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed accompanying the round performance (see FIG. 28(B)). , there is a risk that the player may misunderstand it as a mere performance and may not be able to fully grasp the situation in which the game cannot be played. Therefore, in the second modification, by performing a round alternative effect shown in FIG. 55(B) instead of the round effect, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the situation has changed significantly.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53, when the state shifts from the jackpot game state to the high base state (time saving state), the time saving mode alternative performance shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the time-saving mode alternative performance, as shown in FIG. 55(C), a time-saving alternative background image G117 representing dark clouds and thunder is displayed. Then, the effect pattern EZ and the game stop notice image KI are displayed superimposed on the time-saving alternative background image G117. Furthermore, a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" is displayed on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention.

In this way, since the number of differential balls is 80,000 or more, even in the high base state (time-saving state), the time-saving mode effect shown in FIG. 18 (B-5) is not executed, and the time-saving mode effect shown in FIG. The time-saving mode alternative effect shown in is executed. This makes it possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which he or she will not be able to play the game. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for players who are not fully aware of the over-prize ball prevention function to realize that although they are in a situation where it is easy to win a type 2 jackpot game, they are in a situation where they have to stop playing the game. It is possible.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the high base state (time saving state) is shifted to the normal gaming state, and the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 at the time of shifting to the normal gaming state is "4". In this case, on the display screen 50a, the remaining reservation alternative special effect shown in FIG. 56 is executed. Specifically, in the remaining reservation alternative special performance (special performance), as shown in FIG. A remaining number of game cancellations image LH1 indicating "last 4 games until game cancellation" is displayed. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of variations in the special symbols until the game becomes impossible to play. It should be noted that the number of times indicated by the remaining number of game cancellations image LH1 ranges from "4" to "1" depending on the number of special symbols 2 remaining on hold. In this way, in the second modified example, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative effect of notifying the number of changes in the remaining special symbols until the game is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(B), special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 50a, and the lower part of the display screen 50a shows "Will it be a jackpot if the V's line up?" An explanation image SM is displayed. This explanatory image SM allows the player to understand that a jackpot game will be executed if "V" is aligned in the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2. Further, at the top of the display screen 50a, a remaining number of game cancellations image LN1 indicating "4 games remaining until game cancellation" is displayed. Thereby, even when the special symbol (second special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible for the player to be aware of the remaining number of variations in the special symbol until the game is stopped. In addition, the number of times indicated by the remaining game stop count image LN1 is from "4" to "1" depending on the number of special symbols 2 remaining on hold. This display of the remaining number of game cancellations image LN1 corresponds to a "game disablement notice effect".

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), on the display screen 50a, the special effect pattern TZ1 on the left side is stopped and displayed at "V", while the special effect pattern TZ2 on the right side continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner. There is. After that, if you win a small hit or a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, the special effect pattern TZ2 on the right side will stop and display "V" as shown in Figure 56 (D-1), and will be completed. Also, at this time, the small performance symbol KZ that has been variably displayed at the upper left of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed in the winning mode "555" which is a double number. In this way, the player who sees the special performance symbols TZ1, TZ2 indicating "VV" and the small performance symbol KZ of doubles can be made to understand that he or she has won a small hit or a jackpot. Thereafter, if the player has won a small win, by passing the game ball through a specific area during the execution of the small win game, the second type jackpot game can be won. Furthermore, if the player has won a jackpot, he or she can win a type 1 jackpot game.

On the other hand, if you lose in the lottery for special drawing 2, as shown in Figure 56 (D-2), the special effect pattern TZ2 on the right side will stop displaying at "1" and the "V" will not line up. . Also, at this time, the small performance symbol KZ that has been being displayed in a variable manner at the upper left of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed at "545", which is a reach miss. In this way, the player who sees the special performance symbols TZ1 and TZ2 indicating "V1" and the small performance symbol KZ of the reach loss can be made aware of the loss. Further, at the lower right part of the display screen, a remaining number of times image NC indicating "3 chances remaining" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to understand that the over-winning ball prevention function is about to operate (stop the game). Thereafter, in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, the remaining reservation alternative special effect shown in FIG. 56 is repeatedly executed. Then, if all the lottery results for special pattern 2 are loses, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) ends (when the stop time of the second special pattern has elapsed). As a result, the game is controlled to be unplayable.

As mentioned above, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, instead of the remaining pending special performance, a remaining pending alternative special performance with a significantly different performance mode is executed, making the player more aware of the situation in which it becomes impossible to play the game. It is possible to do so. In other words, if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the remaining reservation special performance shown in FIG. There is a risk of misunderstanding that the prevention function will not operate. In other words, in the remaining reservation special performance, even if the number of reserved balls of special drawings 2 is all consumed and the advantageous period ends, the player is likely to have the impression that the game can still be continued by shifting to the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the second modified example, instead of the remaining reservation special performance, by executing the remaining reservation alternative special performance shown in FIG. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the situation in which the game becomes impossible.

<Third modification example>
In the above form, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition is made from the high base state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) to the normal gaming state (see Figure 25), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. I decided to do so. On the other hand, in the third modified example, as shown in FIG. When executed (when a predetermined condition is met), the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this third modification, it is assumed that the game machine is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, similar to the above embodiment.

In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 57, after the transition from the high-accuracy-high base state to the normal gaming state, the special mode after the normal shift is set until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 30. In addition, after the transition from the low-probability-high base state to the normal gaming state, until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 30, the special mode after the normal transition is similarly set. In short, even if the state shifts from the high base state to the normal gaming state, the normal performance mode is not set for a while, and the exclusive mode is set after the normal shift. Then, when the number of variations of the special symbol exceeds 30 times after shifting to the normal game state, the normal performance mode is set.

Next, in the first modification, the performance in the special mode after normal transition will be explained. In addition, in the dedicated mode after normal transition, even if there is special symbol 2 remaining pending when transitioning to the normal gaming state and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol 2 remaining pending when transitioning to the normal gaming state. The same effect is executed regardless of whether there is no special symbol or the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, when transitioning to the exclusive mode after normal transition, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a mode transition image MT indicating "entering exclusive mode after normal transition" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that although the high base state has ended, the game has shifted to a special performance mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(B), on the display screen 50a, a special background image G121 representing the surface of a special planet is displayed, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. After that, if the lottery of the special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed at "8" which is a loss mode. In this manner, the performance in which the performance symbol EZ fluctuates and then stops displaying while the special background image G121 is being displayed will be referred to as a "dedicated performance after normal transition". As a result of the above, after the transition from the high base state to the normal gaming state, as long as the special symbol lottery is a loss, the special performance after the normal transition (special performance) will be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times. be done. In this way, after transitioning to the normal gaming state, the player is given a new special post-transition effect instead of the familiar normal mode effects (see Figure 18 (B-1), (B-2), and (B-3)). show. As a result, it is possible to create an impression that the advantageous situation may still continue.

In this third modification, when the difference number of balls is less than 80,000, the special effect after the normal transition shown in FIG. 58 is executed from the transition to the normal gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times. be done. On the other hand, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, the special effect after the normal transition shown in FIG. 58 is executed until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times after the transition to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 57). be done. In this way, after transitioning to the normal gaming state, as long as the special performance continues after the transition to normal, the over-winning ball prevention function will not operate. Therefore, even if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, it is possible for the player to enjoy the novel post-normal transition exclusive performance after transitioning to the normal gaming state. Then, when the variable display of special symbols is executed 30 times after the transition to the normal game state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated at the same time as the special performance ends after the transition to the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to match the timing at which the game becomes unexecutable and the timing at which the special performance after normal transition ends.

<Fourth variation>
In the third modified example, even if the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the special effect after the normal transition shown in FIG. 58 is executed from the transition to the normal gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times. I made it so that it would be done. On the other hand, in the fourth modification, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 or more, after the transition to the normal gaming state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times, the special effect will be replaced after the transition to the normal state. The alternative effect after normal transition shown in FIG. 59 is executed. This fourth modification is assumed to be configured as a type 1 gaming machine, similar to the third modification. Then, the effect of the fourth modification will be explained using as an example a case where the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 57.

When the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts from the high-accuracy/high-base state to the normal game state, first, as shown in FIG. A remaining number of game cancellations image LH2 is displayed. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of variations in the special symbols until the game becomes impossible to play. In this way, in the fourth modification, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative performance of notifying the remaining number of variations of special symbols until the game is stopped when the game shifts to the normal game state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the effect pattern EZ is variably displayed on the display screen 50a while a light ray background image G122 representing flowing light rays is displayed. Furthermore, a mini-character image MN1 representing a mini-character is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 50a. Further, at the top of the display screen 50a, a remaining number of game cancellations image LN2 indicating "30 games remaining until game cancellation" is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the remaining number of changes in the special symbols until the game is stopped even when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. It should be noted that the number of times indicated by the remaining number of game stoppages image LN2 is counted down from "30" to "1" each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a character appearance image TN1 representing a character that has grown greatly is displayed on the display screen 50a. In this manner, in the alternative performance after normal transition, the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine PY1 are sequentially introduced by displaying the mini character image MN1 and the character appearance image TN1 each time the variable display of special symbols is executed. By executing such a character introduction performance, it is possible to make the player think that the performance is like an ending until the game is stopped. That is, by sequentially introducing the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine PY1, it is possible to make it appear as if the end of the game is gradually approaching.

If the special symbol lottery is a loss, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed at "145", which is a loss mode, as shown in FIG. 59(D). As described above, when the difference number of balls is 80,000 or more, the alternative performance after the normal transition is executed from the transition to the normal gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times. In this way, from the transition to the normal gaming state until the game is stopped, the alternative performance after normal transition shown in FIG. 59 is executed, which is better than when the special performance after normal transition shown in FIG. Also, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the situation in which the game becomes impossible to play. In other words, by using the post-normal transition alternative performance shown in FIG. 59, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that he is gradually approaching a situation where he will no longer be able to play the game.

<Fifth modification example>
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (the game stop flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 101 executes the firing control process (S109), After the prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the firing control process (S109). In contrast, in the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 60, the main side timer interrupt process (S006) does not include the firing control process (S109). That is, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the firing control process (S109) regardless of the operation of the over-prize ball prevention function. In this fifth modification, the launch of game balls is controlled by a microcomputer for payout control provided on the payout control board 170.

In short, in the above embodiment, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the firing control process (S109), so the game balls are not fired towards the game area 6. On the other hand, in the fifth modification, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not stop controlling the firing of the game balls, so the game balls are directed toward the game area 6. fired. In this case, even though the game cannot be played, the player can fire the game ball, so there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the game can be played.

Therefore, in the fifth modification, after the game becomes impossible to execute, a contact attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) is executed by the player touching the handle 72k. Note that in the fifth modification, a handle contact detection sensor is provided on the handle 72k. The handle contact detection sensor detects contact of the human body with the handle 72k. In other words, the handle contact detection sensor detects contact with the handle 72k just by the player touching the handle 72k before rotating the handle 72k. In this manner, when the player touches the handle 72k, a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor is output to the performance control microcomputer 121. Hereinafter, based on FIG. 61, a description will be given of a contact alert performance executed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a case where a contact attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) is executed after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. First, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 61(A), and the speaker A game stop sound is output from 52. Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the panel lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player touches the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the contact alert performance while the red background image RE and the error release method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 61(B). do. That is, a contact warning image HU indicating "Please take your hands off the handle" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please take your hands off the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. This contact attention-calling performance can make the player more aware of the fact that he cannot touch the handle 72k and cannot play the game.

Thereafter, when the player no longer touches the handle 72k, the production control microcomputer 121 no longer receives a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the contact attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 61(C). In this manner, in this embodiment, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, as long as the player is touching the handle 72k, the contact alert performance is executed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a case where a contact attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) is executed after illegal magnetism is detected. First, when illegal magnetism is detected, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ER1 on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. A game stop sound is output from 52. Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the panel lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player touches the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the contact alert performance while the red background image RE and the error release method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 62(B). do. That is, a contact warning image HU indicating "Please take your hands off the handle" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please take your hands off the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and panel lamp 54 are all lit in red. This contact attention-calling performance can make the player more aware of the fact that he cannot touch the handle 72k and cannot play the game.

Thereafter, when the player no longer touches the handle 72k, the performance control microcomputer 121 no longer receives a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the contact attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 62(C). In this manner, in this embodiment, after the illegal magnetism is detected, as long as the player is touching the handle 72k, the contact alert performance is executed.

In this fifth modification, even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be unplayable, the player can fire the game ball toward the game area 6 by rotating the handle 72k. can do. However, if the player touches the handle 72k, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a contact alert effect is executed to call attention. Thereby, the player who is touching the handle 72k even though the game cannot be executed is made aware of releasing his hand from the handle 72k, and is made to surely understand that the game cannot be executed. is possible.

Furthermore, in the fifth modification, even if illegal magnetism is detected and the game is controlled to be unplayable, the player can fire the game ball toward the game area 6 by rotating the handle 72k. I can do it. However, if the player touches the handle 72k, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a contact alert effect is executed to call attention. As a result, the player who is touching the handle 72k even though the game cannot be executed is made aware of the fact that he/she should take his/her hand off the handle 72k, thereby surely understanding that the game cannot be executed. is possible.

<Sixth variation>
In the second modified example, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the round alternative effect shown in FIG. 55(B), the time saving mode alternative effect shown in FIG. 55(C), and the remaining reservation alternative shown in FIG. A special performance was performed. On the other hand, in the sixth modification, the round alternative performance (alternative performance) shown in FIG. 63(B) and the fixed variable mode alternative performance (alternative performance) shown in FIG. 63(C) are executed. It has become. In this sixth modification, like the above embodiment, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition from the high base state to the normal gaming state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. The game is controlled so that it cannot be executed.

In this sixth modification, it is assumed that a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 63(A), while the jackpot game is being executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state. As a result, a round alternative effect is executed as shown in FIG. 63(B). That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitute background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building and a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGEER" are displayed. Thereafter, when the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high-accuracy, high-base state.

In the high-accuracy, high-base state, instead of the probability change mode performance shown in FIG. 18 (B-4),
The variable probability mode alternative performance shown in C) is executed. Specifically, in the variable probability mode alternative performance, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a background image G118 for variable probability substitution representing a black hole in outer space is displayed. Then, the effect pattern EZ is displayed superimposed on the variable probability alternative background image G118. Furthermore, a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGER" is displayed on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a to attract the player's attention. Further, a remaining number of game cancellations image LN3 indicating "last 160 games until game cancellation" is displayed, superimposed on the variable probability alternative background image G118. This allows the player to accurately grasp the number of variations in the special symbols until the game becomes impossible to play. It should be noted that the number of times indicated by the remaining game stop count image LN3 is counted down by one each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This display of the remaining number of game cancellations image LN3 corresponds to a "game disablement notice effect".

In this way, since the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the probability variable mode alternative performance shown in FIG. 63(C) is executed in the high probability high base state before the game becomes impossible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which the game cannot be played, compared to the case where the variable probability mode effect shown in FIG. 18 (B-4) is executed. Furthermore, by looking at the game stop remaining count image LN3 that is counting down, you can feel the sense of urgency as to whether you will be able to hit the jackpot and continue playing, or you will not be able to hit the jackpot and will be unable to continue playing. It is possible to provide games.

<Seventh modification example>
In the sixth modification, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the round alternative presentation shown in FIG. 63(B) and the probability variable mode alternative presentation shown in FIG. 63(C) are executed. On the other hand, in the seventh modification, only the round alternative effect shown in FIG. 64(B) is executed. In this seventh modification, like the above embodiment, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state (jackpot game) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. The game is controlled so that it cannot be executed.

In this seventh modification, it is assumed that a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 64(A) while the jackpot game is being executed. Here, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state, a round alternative effect is executed as shown in FIG. 64(B). That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitute background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building and a warning display image G115 showing a police lamp and the word "DANGEER" are displayed. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a game stop notice image KL indicating "game stop when jackpot ends" is displayed. The display of this game stop notice image KL corresponds to a "game disable notice effect".

In this way, when the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more, the round effect shown in FIG. 64(A) is switched to the round alternative effect shown in FIG. 64(B). Thereby, it is possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which he or she will not be able to play the game. Furthermore, it is possible for the player who sees the game stop notice image KL to know in advance that the game will no longer be playable when the jackpot game currently being executed ends.

<Eighth modification example>
In the above embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 70,000 or more, the display of the over-prized ball preview image KY shown in FIG. 28(A) (advance preview effect) predicts that the game will not be playable. On the other hand, in the eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 65, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, a standard number reaching notification effect is used to foretell that the game will no longer be playable. . The standard number arrival notice performance (advance notice performance) will be described in detail later, but it is a performance that indicates that the number of differential balls will reach the standard number of 80,000 while forewarning that the game will become impossible to play. . This eighth modification is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, similar to the above embodiment. Then, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function.

Here, the difference in the number of balls (78,500), which is the trigger for starting the standard number reaching preview effect, will be explained. In the eighth modification, similar to the above embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot symbols) to be won include jackpot symbols X, jackpot symbols Y, and jackpot symbols Z (see FIG. 12(B)). The jackpot game (jackpot game Further, the jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when winning with the jackpot symbol Y is essentially 4R (see FIG. 16), and is set to be able to award 600 prize balls. In addition, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z) when winning with the jackpot symbol Z is essentially 10R (see FIG. 16), and is set to be able to award 1500 (specified number) prize balls.

Therefore, in the eighth modification, among the jackpot symbols that can be won, the jackpot symbol Z is the jackpot symbol with the largest number of prize balls that can be awarded. Therefore, in the eighth modification, the number of difference balls (specific number) that triggers the start of the standard number reaching notice performance is changed from the standard number of 80,000 to the number of prize balls (1,500) that can be awarded with the jackpot symbol Z. ) is subtracted from the number. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65, if the difference in the number of balls becomes 78,500 or more in a certain jackpot game state, there is a possibility that the difference in the number of balls in the next jackpot game state becomes 80,000 or more. As a result of the above, in consideration of the possibility that the number of difference balls will be 80,000 or more in the next jackpot game state, the number of difference balls (78,500) that triggers the start of the standard number arrival notice performance is changed to the standard number ( 80,000) minus the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol Z) that can award the most prize balls in one jackpot game.

By the way, when the number of differential balls reaches the standard number of 80,000, it is in the so-called rush state (in type 1 gaming machines, the high probability high base state or small hit rush state (high probability low base state), in the type 1 and 2 type gaming machines If so, it is assumed that there are many situations in which the state (time saving state) continues and the state is a jackpot game state when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery. Therefore, from the standard number, the difference number of balls that triggers the start of the standard number arrival notice performance is not the jackpot symbol won in the special drawing 1 lottery, but the largest number of jackpot symbols won in the special drawing 2 lottery. It can also be said that it is preferable to set the value by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol Z) that can award prize balls.

In particular, in the eighth modification, there is only one type of jackpot symbol Z, which is the jackpot symbol that is won in the special drawing 2 lottery. Therefore, if the number of difference balls (78,500) that triggers the start of the standard number arrival notice performance is set to the value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1,500) that can be awarded by the jackpot symbol Z from the standard number (80,000), the rush After the number of difference balls reaches 78,500 or more in the jackpot game state when the state continues, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of difference balls reaches the standard number (80,000) in the next jackpot game state with a high probability. It is.

Next, the performance of the eighth modification will be explained based on FIG. 66. As a precondition, it is assumed that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a round image G109, a prize ball number image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, as shown in FIG. 65(A), it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 in the middle of the jackpot game state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 sends an over-prize ball notice command (see step S307) to the production control microcomputer 121, and the production control microcomputer 121 grasps the situation where the difference in number of balls is 78,500 or more. do. Thereby, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the next jackpot arrival preview performance shown in FIG. 66(B).

Specifically, in the next jackpot arrival preview performance, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a next jackpot arrival preview image ZY indicating "Maybe there is an abnormality in the over-prize ball after the next jackpot ends?" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to know in advance that the game may become impossible to play once the next jackpot game ends. This next jackpot arrival preview performance is a performance that is executed when the standard number arrival preview performance is started as a part of the standard number arrival preview performance (advance notice performance).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a running up effect and a mini screen effect are executed. The run-up effect is an effect that shows a process in which the difference in the number of balls increases from 78,500 to 80,000 depending on the positional relationship between the character and the slope. This run-up effect is executed in the main display area 51a (large display area) of the display screen 50a, excluding the lower right display area 51b. Furthermore, the running up performance can be executed continuously until the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, asynchronously (irrespectively) with the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) and variable performance that are currently being executed. It has become.

On the other hand, the mini-screen performance is a performance that was executed in a situation where the difference in the number of balls is less than 78,500 (jackpot performance, variable performance, customer waiting performance, etc.) on the lower right display area 51b (small display This is a performance performed in the area). That is, due to the mini-screen effect, the effect that was being performed on the entire display screen 50a in a situation where the difference in the number of balls is less than 78,500 will be performed in a reduced state in the lower right display area 51b. In this way, when the difference in number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, the player is made to mainly focus on the process by which the difference in number of balls goes from 78,500 to 80,000, and the jackpot performance and variable performance are supplementarily shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(C), in the running up effect, a running up image KG is shown in which a predetermined character runs up from the bottom of the slope toward the goal at the top. In the running up image KG, the current difference in the number of balls is indicated by the position where the character is running with respect to the slope. That is, when the difference in the number of balls is 78,500, the character is located at the lowest point on the slope, and when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more, the character is located at the goal, which is the top of the slope. Note that when the difference in the number of balls becomes less than 78,500, the character becomes invisible from the main display area 51a. Then, when the difference in the number of balls becomes less than 78,000 (lower limit of effect), the running effect and the mini screen effect are stopped, and the effect that was being executed in the mini screen effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. It has become. In this way, after the run-up effect has started, it continues to be executed only in situations where the difference in the number of balls is 78,000 or more (lower limit value of effect), making it easy for the player to understand that the over-prize ball prevention function will be activated soon. Showing. The run-up performance is a performance that is executed after the next jackpot arrival preview performance as a part of the standard number arrival preview performance (advance notice performance).

Then, as shown in FIG. 66(C), when the run-up effect is executed, a mini prize pitch number image g110 indicating "750 pt" and a mini round background are displayed as a mini screen effect in the lower right display area 51b. Image g114 is displayed. However, even if the mini-screen effect is being executed, the round image G109 and the right-handed image G108G are displayed in the main display area 51a. This is because the round image G109 and the right-handed image G108G are images that show the progress of the game and the method of playing the game, and it is preferable to show them larger and easier to understand for the player than other performance images.

Thereafter, as the round game progresses and the number of prize balls for the player increases, a mini prize ball number image g110 indicating "1395 pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, as shown in FIG. 66(D). . At this time, the main display area 51a shows a running up image KG in which the character is running on a slope above the position shown in FIG. 66(C). In this way, in the running-up image KG, the larger the number of difference balls, the higher the character is located with respect to the slope, and the larger the number of difference balls at the moment is visually shown to the player.

Next, when the round game ends and the ending starts, as shown in FIG. 67(A), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini-ending image g111 that suggests the probability-changing effect mode to be set after the jackpot game is displayed. is displayed. Subsequently, when the high accuracy high base state is controlled, the mini accuracy variation background image g105 is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, as shown in FIG. 67(B). Further, in the lower right display area 51b, a mini effect pattern ez (reduced effect pattern) smaller than the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a stopped state after being fluctuated. In this way, while the mini screen performance is being executed, the player can grasp the result of the jackpot determination process by the display mode of the mini performance symbols ez (left mini performance pattern ez1, middle mini performance pattern ez2, right mini performance pattern ez3). There is.

Here, in the running up effect shown in FIG. 67(B), a running up image KG is shown in which the character is running on a slope below the position shown in FIG. 66(C). This is because the number of balls fired has increased since the end of the jackpot game, and the difference in the number of balls has become smaller. In this way, in the run-up effect, even when the difference in the number of balls becomes small, the current large number of difference in balls is clearly shown to the player according to the position of the character. And, the running up effect being executed in the main display area 51a is asynchronous with the mini fluctuation effect (the effect accompanied by the fluctuating display and stop display of the mini effect pattern ez) being executed in the lower right display area 51b. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to simultaneously enjoy a running performance where the player can see the large number of difference balls and a mini fluctuating performance where the player can see whether the game has won or not.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(C), in the lower right display area 51b, the main character and the enemy character fight with the left mini effect pattern ez1 and the right mini effect pattern ez3 in the reach mode. A background image g113 for mini SP reach is displayed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp the large number of difference balls in the main display area 51a, and to grasp the situation where the expectation of winning is high in the lower right display area 51b.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(D), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini SP reach background image g113 showing that the main character is happy after winning the battle is displayed, and the left mini effect The symbol ez1, the middle mini performance symbol ez2, and the right mini performance symbol ez3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (stop mode "555" suggesting a jackpot). This allows the player to understand the situation in which he or she has won a jackpot in the lower right display area 51b. Note that the display of the mini SP reach background image g113 showing that the main character is happy after winning the battle corresponds to the "reduction winning suggestion effect".

Thereafter, a jackpot game is started, and when the opening ends, a round game is started. As a result, when the game progresses to the fifth round, a mini prize ball count image g110 indicating "730 pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, as shown in FIG. 68(A). At this time, the main display area 51a shows a running up image KG in which the character is running near the top of the slope (near the goal). Note that at the time shown in FIG. 68(A), the difference in the number of balls is 79985.

Then, when the game ball enters the grand prize opening 14, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a mini prize ball number image g110 indicating "745 pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b. At this time, a running up image KG showing that the character has reached the top of the slope (goal) is displayed in the main display area 51a. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(C), in the main display area 51a, the running up effect is finished and a blessing effect is executed (see FIG. 65). In the blessing performance, a blessing image SF indicating "Congratulations on achieving 80,000 shots!!" is displayed in the main display area 51a. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. In other words, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, the congratulatory effect gives the player a sense of accomplishment in creating an extremely rare situation, without making the player aware of the disadvantage that the game will stop. That's what I do. Note that the blessing performance continues until the jackpot game ends in the main display area 51a. Then, in the lower right display area 51b, mini-screen effects (round effect, ending effect) will continue to be performed.

Thereafter, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. At this time, the blessing effect in the main display area 51a and the mini screen effect in the lower right display area 51b are finished, and as shown in FIG. 68(D), the red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a. At the same time, an error release method image ERX indicating "Error Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. Thereby, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the situation has become such that the game cannot be played.

In this eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 65, based on the difference in the number of balls being 78,500 or more, the standard number arrival preview performance (next jackpot arrival preview performance (see FIG. 66(B)), run-up performance (Refer to FIGS. 66(C) to 68(B)) is executed.Then, this standard number reaching preview effect is executed asynchronously with the currently executed effects (jackpot effect, variable effect, etc.), and the This continues until the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.In this way, from the time when the difference number of balls reaches 78,500 or more until it reaches 80,000 or more, the player is given a natural warning effect by the asynchronously executed notice that the number of balls has reached the standard number. It is possible to make it appear as if the game is becoming impossible to play due to a certain flow.

Further, in the eighth modification, as shown in FIGS. 67(B) to (D), during the execution of the running up effect (reference number reaching preview effect), the mini effect symbols eg1, ez2 are displayed in the lower right display area 51b. , ez3 displays a variable display and then stops displaying. In this way, the mini performance symbols eg1, ez2, and ez3, which replace the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, indicate the result of the jackpot determination process, and also grasp the run-up performance (preliminary performance for reaching the standard number) that indicates the current difference in the number of balls. It is possible to prevent this from becoming difficult.

Further, in the eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 67(D), when it is suggested that a jackpot game will be executed during the execution of the running-up effect (reference number arrival notice effect), ) A mini SP reach background image g113 that is a reduced version of the SP reach background image G113 shown in ) is displayed. In this way, the background image g113 for mini SP reach, which replaces the background image G113 for SP reach, suggests that a jackpot game will be executed, and also creates a run-up effect (preliminary effect of reaching the standard number) that shows the current difference in the number of balls. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in the eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 65, until the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, the number of prize balls awarded in one jackpot game (jackpot game Z (see FIG. 16)) is equal to or less than the number of prize balls (1,500). When this happens, a standard number arrival preview performance (next jackpot arrival preview performance, running up performance) is executed. In this way, the standard number reaching effect is executed only in a situation where the next jackpot game is likely to become impossible to execute. In other words, even though the difference in the number of balls is, for example, 70,000, which is significantly smaller than 80,000, the reference number reaching preview effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution timing of the standard number arrival preview performance (next jackpot arrival preview performance, run-up performance) at a timing that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

<9th modification example>
In the eighth modification, the only type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) that can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery is the jackpot symbol Z (see FIG. 12(B)). On the other hand, in the ninth modification, there are two types of jackpots (jackpot symbols) that can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery: jackpot symbols Z1 and jackpot symbols Z2 ( (See Figure 69). Note that the following description will focus on the differences from the eighth modification.

In the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 69, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, if the jackpot symbol type random number is "0 to 7", the jackpot symbol Z1 (second win) is won. If the jackpot symbol type random number value is “8 to 9”, the jackpot symbol Z2 (first win) is obtained. Note that there are two types of jackpots that can be won in the lottery of special drawing 1: jackpot symbol X and jackpot symbol Y, as in the eighth modification.

In the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 70, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when winning with the jackpot symbol Z1 is essentially 10R, and 1500 (second specified number) prize balls are awarded. is set to possible. On the other hand, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when winning with the jackpot symbol Z2 is essentially 3R, and is set to be able to award 450 (first specified number) prize balls. As described above, in the ninth modified example, the jackpot symbol Z2 won in the lottery of special pattern 2<the jackpot symbol Y won in the lottery of special pattern 1<the jackpot symbol X won in the lottery of special pattern 1<the lottery of special pattern 2 It is set that a large number of prize balls can be awarded in one jackpot game in the order of the winning jackpot symbols Z1.

Here, in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 71, based on the difference in the number of balls being 78,500 or more, a next jackpot reaching suggestion effect (see FIG. 72(C)), which will be described later, is executed. The performance suggesting that the next jackpot will be reached (advance notice performance) is a performance that foretells that the game will not be playable, and suggests that the number of difference balls may reach 80,000 during the execution of the next jackpot game. It is a performance that However, in the ninth modification, unlike the eighth modification, the performance suggesting next jackpot is not necessarily executed when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more. That is, the performance suggesting the next jackpot (advance notice performance) of the ninth modification is executed only at the ending of the jackpot game. In this way, by executing the next jackpot hinting effect only at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent players who are enjoying jackpot games (especially round games) from being overly aware of the over-winning ball prevention function. It is possible to

In the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 71, after the ending in which the next jackpot achievement suggestion effect is executed, in the game state after the jackpot game (high certainty high base state), the mini next jackpot is reached, which will be described later. A suggestive effect (see FIG. 72(D)) is executed. Thereafter, if the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more in the next jackpot game state, the game will be controlled to be unexecutable at the timing when that jackpot game state ends.

Next, a production example of the ninth modification will be described based on FIG. 72. As a precondition, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled and the difference in the number of balls in the round game is 78,500 or more (see FIG. 71(A)). At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a prize ball number image G110 indicating "750 pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. However, even though the difference in the number of balls is 78,500 or more, the effect that foretells that the game will not be playable is not executed. Thereafter, when the round game is finished and the ending is started, an ending image G111 suggesting the probability change production mode is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 72(B).

Subsequently, during this ending, as shown in FIG. 72(C), an effect suggesting the next jackpot is reached is executed. Specifically, in the next jackpot achievement suggestion performance, a next jackpot achievement suggestion image ZK indicating "Maybe there is an abnormality in the over-prize ball after the next jackpot ends?" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Thereby, it is possible for the player to know in advance that the game may become impossible to play once the next jackpot game ends. And, this next jackpot achievement suggestion performance is not executed before the ending starts in the jackpot game when the difference number of balls is 78,500 or more, but after the ending starts, so The player is not aware of the over-prize ball prevention function during a round game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the display of the next jackpot preview image ZY (see FIG. 66(B)) during the round game, as in the eighth modification. be.

After that, when the ending is completed and the state shifts to the high-accuracy/high-base state, the background image G105 for probability variation is displayed on the display screen 50a, and a mini-next jackpot hinting effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 72(D). is executed. Specifically, in the mini-next jackpot achievement suggestion performance, a mini-next jackpot achievement suggestion image zk is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a, indicating "Maybe there is an abnormality in the over-prize ball after the next jackpot ends?" This mini next jackpot attainment suggestion image Zk is smaller than the next jackpot attainment suggestion image ZK displayed at the above-mentioned ending, and does not easily obstruct the visibility of the effect pattern EZ.

In this way, the mini-next jackpot hinting effect makes the player aware that even if he or she is playing in a high-probability, high-base state, the player may not be able to play the game once the next jackpot game ends. It is possible to do so. Note that the mini next jackpot achievement suggestion performance continues to be executed until the high-certain high-base state ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, the player wins a jackpot in the high-accuracy, high-base state, and the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute.

In this ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 69, types of jackpot include jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, and jackpot symbol Z2. In particular, in the rush state (high-accuracy, high-base state), it is generally assumed that a jackpot will be won in the special drawing 2 lottery, but the types of jackpots won in the special drawing 2 drawing include jackpot symbols. There are Z1 (first win) and jackpot symbol Z2 (second win). In the jackpot game Z1 based on the winning of the jackpot symbol Z1, 1500 prize balls are awarded, while in the jackpot game Z2 based on the winning of the jackpot symbol Z2, 450 prize balls are awarded. It is set to be

In this setting, in the ninth modified example, as shown in FIG. 71, based on the difference in the number of balls becoming 78,500 or more, the next jackpot achievement suggestion effect is started. That is, based on the fact that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game Z1 becomes 1,500 or less by the time the difference number of balls reaches 80,000, the next jackpot achievement suggestion performance is started. In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of wins, it is possible to start the performance suggesting the arrival of the next jackpot, assuming that the jackpot symbol Z1, which is advantageous to the player, will be won in the next jackpot. In particular, although there are four types of wins, it is possible to start the performance suggesting the next jackpot by assuming that the jackpot symbol Z1, which is most advantageous for the player, will be won in the next jackpot.

In the ninth modification, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 78,500 or more during execution of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a performance suggesting next jackpot will be started during the ending of the jackpot game. Thereby, just before the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make the player understand that a situation has arisen that may make it impossible to play the next jackpot game, by means of the next jackpot achievement suggestion performance. In other words, in a jackpot game, even if the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 or more, the performance suggesting next jackpot is not started until the ending starts. Thereby, it is possible for the player to enjoy the jackpot game without being overly aware that the game will be impossible.

<10th modification example>
In the ninth modification, based on the difference in the number of balls being 78,500 or more, the next jackpot hinting effect is executed, which foretells that the game will be impossible to play. On the other hand, in the 10th modification, based on the difference in the number of balls being 79,550 or more, an over-prized ball abnormal notice performance (advance notice performance) that foretells that the game will become impossible to play is executed. It has become. In the 10th modification, similar to the 9th modification, types of jackpots to be won include jackpot symbol X, jackpot symbol Y, jackpot symbol Z1, and jackpot symbol Z2 (see FIGS. 69 and 70). Below, the explanation will focus on the differences from the ninth modification. Here, in the tenth modification, in the difference ball number calculation process (S303) shown in FIG. Thus, the production control microcomputer 121 can successively grasp the difference in the number of balls.

In the tenth modification, the difference number of balls (79550) that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance will be explained. In the tenth modification, in a jackpot game (jackpot game In addition, in a jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when a jackpot symbol Y is won, it is set that 600 prize balls can be awarded. In addition, in the jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when winning with the jackpot symbol Z1 (second win), it is set that 1500 prize balls can be awarded. In addition, in the jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when winning with the jackpot symbol Z2 (first win), it is set that 450 prize balls can be awarded.

Therefore, in the tenth modification, among the jackpot symbols that can be won, the jackpot symbol Z2 is the jackpot symbol with the smallest number of prize balls that can be awarded. Therefore, in the 10th modification, the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the excessive prize ball abnormal notice performance is changed from the standard number of 80,000 to the number of prize balls that can be awarded with the jackpot symbol Z2 (450, the first The number is calculated by subtracting the specified number). As a result, as shown in FIG. 73, if the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more in a certain jackpot game state, it is extremely likely that the difference in the number of balls will be 80,000 or more in that jackpot game state or the next jackpot game state. It gets expensive. As a result of the above, considering that unless the number of difference balls decreases, the number of difference balls will almost certainly be 80,000 or more by the next jackpot game state, the number of difference balls that will trigger the start of the over-prize ball abnormal notice performance ( 79550) is the value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (450) of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol Z2) that can award the least number of prize balls in one jackpot game from the reference number (80,000).

In this tenth modification, as shown in FIG. 73, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,550 or more, an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed. That is, as in the ninth modification, the next jackpot achievement suggestion performance is not started after the ending of the jackpot game is started based on the difference in the number of balls being 78,550 or more (see FIG. 71). . This means that when the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more in a certain jackpot game (round game), the difference in the number of balls may reach 80,000 or more in the currently running jackpot game (round game). In this case, if the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance is started after the ending has started, the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance will be started immediately before the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the player will be forced to realize that the game cannot be played immediately before the game is stopped, which is not a good timing to execute the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance.

Next, a production example of the tenth modification will be described based on FIG. 74. As a precondition, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled and the difference in the number of balls is slightly less than 79,550. At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a prize ball number image G110 indicating "1200 pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, it is assumed that the game ball enters the big winning hole 14 and the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, an over-prize ball abnormality notice image ZI is displayed that indicates "an over-prize ball abnormality with an increase of 450 shots remaining." This allows the player to know in advance that if the number of differential balls increases by another 450, the game will become impossible to play. This over-prize ball abnormality notice performance is executed for about 5 seconds (a predetermined number of seconds), and when the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance ends, the residual ball number notification performance is started.

The residual number of balls notification performance is a performance that notifies how many remaining difference balls must be increased before the game is controlled to be impossible to execute (an over-prized ball abnormality occurs). Specifically, after the difference number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, as shown in FIG. 74(C), for example, as shown in FIG. A residual ball number notification image ZS indicating "prize ball abnormality" is displayed. The number shown in the residual number of balls notification image ZS is a value obtained by subtracting the current number of difference balls from 80000, and is updated whenever the difference number of balls changes. In this way, the residual number of balls notification effect allows the player to accurately and at any time know how many remaining balls the difference ball number must increase to make the game unplayable (an over-prized ball abnormality occurs). It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 73, this residual ball number notification effect continues not only in the jackpot game state after the difference ball number reaches 79,550 or more, but also in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game state. is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 74(D), even when the effect pattern EZ is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the high accuracy high base state, the residual ball number notification effect is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. executed. In this way, in the tenth modification, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 79,550 or more, it is possible to grasp the situation of the difference in the number of balls at any time until the next jackpot game is started.

However, in the tenth modification, the residual number of balls notification effect is not executed when the difference number of balls becomes less than 78,500 (lower limit value of effect). This is a larger number of prize balls than the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol Z1) that can award the most prize balls in one jackpot game until the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. This is because it is necessary. In other words, after the next jackpot game ends, the residual ball number notification performance is not executed, taking into account that the over-prize ball prevention function will not operate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the residual ball number notification performance from being executed even though the difference number of balls is sufficiently smaller than 80,000, causing discomfort to the player.

In this 10th modification, as shown in FIG. 73, based on the difference in the number of balls being 79,550 or more, an over-prize ball abnormal notice performance is executed. That is, the over-prize ball abnormal notice performance is executed based on the fact that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game Z2 becomes 450 or less before the difference number of balls reaches 80,000. In this way, even if there are multiple types of wins, the game will become unplayable at least by the end of the next jackpot game, assuming that the player will win the jackpot symbol Z2, which is disadvantageous for the player, in the next jackpot win. When the situation is high, it is possible to execute an over-prized ball abnormal notice performance. In particular, although there are four types of winnings, it is possible to execute an over-prize ball abnormal notice performance assuming that the player will win the next jackpot symbol Z2, which is most disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the tenth modification, as shown in FIG. 73, an over-prize ball abnormality notice performance is executed at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 79,550 or more. In this way, the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 79,550 or more is synchronized with the execution timing of the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance, so that the player can receive one remaining play until the difference number of balls reaches 80,000. It is possible to make the player strongly aware that there is only the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game.

<Eleventh modification example>
In the tenth modification, the number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is fixed at 79,550. In addition, the residual ball number notification performance is executed in the jackpot game state and the game state after the jackpot game (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, normal game state) after the over-prize ball abnormal notice performance is executed. (See Figure 73). However, the tenth modification described above has the following problems.

The number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance is 79,550, but for the player, there is only a short time left until the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 or more, and the timing to start the over-prized ball abnormal notice display is 79,550. You may think it's too late. In addition, the residual ball number notification performance was always executed in the jackpot game state and the game state after the jackpot game after the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance was executed, but the player was always notified of the difference ball number. There is a risk that you may feel bothered by being exposed to such things. In particular, if the residual ball number notification effect is constantly executed in the high-accuracy high-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, and normal gaming state, the remaining difference ball number will gradually increase until the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. It shows what will happen. This also means that it is clearly shown to the player that the number of balls he has is gradually decreasing, which may cause discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the 10th modification, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, an employee of the gaming hall can determine the number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance, and whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification performance. It is configured so that it can be set. Specifically, if the normal button 40 is pressed five times within 30 seconds after RAM clearing is started, an initial function setting image FS (see FIG. 75(B)), which will be described later, is displayed. Then, by switching the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX (see FIG. 75(C)), the employee of the gaming hall can switch the display of the initial function setting image FS to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX (see FIG. 75(C)). You can set the number of balls difference that triggers the start of the game. In addition, by switching the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY (see FIG. 75(D)), which will be described later, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect. can do. Here, the display of the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY corresponds to "the time of initial setting after the power is turned on".

Next, based on FIG. 75, the setting of performance items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance (advance notification performance) and the setting of performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance (advance notification performance) will be explained. Performance matters related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance include whether or not the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance is to be executed, and the number of differential balls that is a trigger for starting the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance. Performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance include whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification performance, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification performance at the opening of the jackpot game, and whether or not to perform the residual ball number notification performance at the opening of the jackpot game. Whether or not to execute in the round game of the game, whether to execute the residual ball number notification performance at the ending of the jackpot game, whether to execute the residual ball number notification performance every time the variable performance is executed, There are two options: whether or not to perform the residual ball number notification performance every time the variable performance is performed five times, and whether to prevent the residual ball number notification performance from being performed during the fluctuation performance.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), when RAM clearing starts after the power is turned on, the display screen 50a displays "Please wait for a while. If you press the push button 5 times during RAM clear notification, the initial function setting image will be displayed." A RAM clear notification image RC is displayed. This allows employees at the gaming parlor to know that RAM clearing has been executed. The RAM clear notification image RC is displayed for only 30 seconds after RAM clearing is started. Therefore, by pressing the normal button 40 five times while the RAM clear notification image RC is being displayed, an employee of the game center can display the initial function setting image FS as shown in FIG. 75(B). It is.

In this way, in the 11th modification, it is possible to display the initial function setting image FS on the condition that the RAM clear has been executed, and to display the performance matters related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and the residual ball number notification performance. Related production matters can be set. In other words, unless the RAM is cleared, the performance items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance cannot be changed.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), in the initial function setting image FS, there is an item indicating "Switch to setting screen" in "Over-prize ball abnormality notice effect setting", and "Setting screen" in "Residual ball number notification effect setting". There is an item indicating ``switch to setting screen'' and an item indicating ``switch to setting screen'' under ``other effect settings.'' Therefore, when an employee of the gaming hall uses the select button to move the cursor to various items and presses the normal button 40, the excessive prize ball abnormal notice performance setting image SX shown in FIG. 75(C) or The residual ball number notification performance setting image SY shown in (D) or other performance setting images (not shown) can be displayed. Note that when the cursor is placed on the "Back" item and the normal button 40 is pressed while the initial function setting image FS is being displayed, the display of the initial function setting image FS is ended. Thereafter, if RAM clearing has been completed, a customer waiting effect is executed on the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 75(C), in the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX, in "Set ON/OFF of over-prized ball abnormality notice performance", an item indicating "ON" and "OFF" are selected. There are items to indicate. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "ON", the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is set not to be executed.

Further, in the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX, a 5-digit number can be selected in "Set the number of difference balls for executing the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance". Therefore, by selecting a five-digit number using the select button, the number of differential balls (specific number) that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance is set. The number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is set to 78,500 as a default (initial setting value). Note that if the over-prize ball abnormal notice performance is set not to be executed, the five-digit number cannot be selected. While displaying the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX, if you move the cursor to the "Back" item and press the normal button 40, the settings will be determined and the initial function setting image FS will be displayed. Return to display.

As shown in FIG. 75(D), in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, in "Set ON/OFF of residual ball number notification effect", an item indicating "ON" and "OFF" are selected. There are items to indicate. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed.

In addition, in the residual ball number notification performance setting image SY, in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot", there is an item indicating "Opening ON" and an item indicating "Opening OFF". Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Opening ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game, on the condition that the excessive prize ball abnormal notice effect is executed. Ru. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Opening OFF", the setting is made such that the residual ball number notification performance is not executed at the opening of the jackpot game. In addition, if the excessive prize ball abnormal notice performance is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball number notification performance is set not to be executed, the item indicating "Opening ON" cannot be selected. It has become.

In addition, in the residual ball number notification performance setting image SY, in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot", there is an item indicating "Round game ON" and an item indicating "Round game OFF". Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Round game ON", the residual ball number notification effect will be executed in the round game of the jackpot game, on the condition that the excessive prize ball abnormal notice effect is executed. Set. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Round Game OFF", the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed in the round game of the jackpot game. In addition, if the excessive prize ball abnormal notice performance is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball number notification performance is set not to be executed, the item indicating "Round game ON" cannot be selected. It looks like this.

In addition, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, there are items indicating "ending ON" and "ending OFF" in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot". Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Ending ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed at the ending of the jackpot game, on the condition that the excessive prize ball abnormal notice effect is executed. Ru. On the other hand, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Ending OFF", the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed at the ending of the jackpot game. In addition, if the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed, the item indicating "Ending ON" cannot be selected. It has become.

In addition, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, in ``Set ON/OFF during variation effect'', there are an item indicating ``Always ON'', an item indicating ``Every 5 variations'', and ``OFF''. There are items to indicate. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Always ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed every time the variable effect is executed (every time the variable effect is executed once). On the other hand, if you move the cursor to the item indicating "every 5 fluctuations", the residual ball number notification effect will be executed every time the 5th variation effect is executed (the residual ball number notification effect will be executed every time the 5th variation effect is executed). In the performance, the residual ball number notification performance is not executed, but is set so that the residual ball number notification performance is executed in the fifth variation performance). In contrast, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", the residual ball number notification performance is set not to be executed at all times during the variable performance. In addition, if the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is set not to be executed, or if the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed, select "Always ON" or "Every 5 fluctuations". The displayed item cannot be selected. While the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is displayed, if you move the cursor to the "Return" item and press the normal button 40, the settings will be determined and the initial function setting image FS will be displayed. Return to display.

Next, a production example of the eleventh modification will be described based on FIG. 76. As a prerequisite, it is assumed that the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is set to be executed, and the number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is set to 75,000 (specific number). In addition, the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed, the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed in the opening of the jackpot game and the round game, and the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed. It is assumed that the setting is made to be executed at the ending of the jackpot game. Further, it is assumed that the residual ball number notification performance is set not to be executed during the fluctuation performance.

In such settings, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is being controlled (a round game is being executed) and the difference in the number of balls is slightly less than 75,000. At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a prize ball number image G110 indicating "1450 pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, it is assumed that the game ball enters the big winning hole 14 and the difference in the number of balls becomes 79,550 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 74(B), on the display screen 50a, an over-prize ball abnormality preview image ZI indicating "over-prize ball abnormality with 5000 additional shots remaining" is displayed. In this way, it is possible to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance based on the difference number of balls (75,000) which is the trigger for starting the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance, as set by the employee of the gaming hall. After that, in the round game being executed, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed. Then, when the game shifts to the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 76(C), on the display screen 50a, an ending image G111 suggesting the probability-variable performance mode is displayed, along with the message "Over-prized balls with an increase of 4,950 shots remaining". A residual ball number notification image ZS indicating "abnormality" is displayed. In this way, as set by the employee of the gaming hall, the residual ball number notification effect is executed only at the ending of the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the round game without making him or her overly aware of the difference in the number of balls.

Thereafter, when the jackpot game (ending) ends and the state shifts to a high probability/high base state, a variation effect is executed on the display screen 50a with the probability variation background image G105 being displayed. At this time, the residual ball number notification image ZS is not displayed. In this way, the residual ball number notification effect is never executed during the execution of the variable effect, as set by the employee of the gaming hall. As a result, during the execution of variable effects (in the high-accuracy high-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, and normal game state), the player is not shown numerically that the number of balls he has is decreasing at any time, and the game It is possible to prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

In this eleventh modification, after the power is turned on, while the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is being displayed, an employee of the gaming hall presses the normal button 40 and Based on the operation of the select button, it is possible to set performance matters related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance. In particular, the number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance can be arbitrarily set. In this way, an employee of the game parlor can appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance depending on the situation.

In the eleventh modification, the employee of the gaming hall can set whether or not to execute the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance as a performance item related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance. Therefore, if it is desired that the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance is not executed, the employee of the gaming hall sets the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance so that it will not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance from causing discomfort to a player who desires that the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance is not executed.

<12th modification example>
In the above-mentioned form and each of the above-mentioned modifications, even after the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, when the player or the like presses the ball lending button 62, the ball lending is executed. On the other hand, in the twelfth modification, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, even if the player or the like presses the ball lending button 62 (operating means), the ball lending is not performed. ing.

Here, the twelfth modification differs from the above embodiment and each modification in the following points. That is, in the twelfth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the game stop flag when determining that there is an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality) in the error process (S111). As a result, the game is controlled to be impossible to play. However, as described above, the game stop flag will not be switched from ON to OFF just by turning the power back on (turning the power OFF and ON), but will be switched from ON to OFF by executing RAM clear. As described above, in the 12th modification, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game stop flag is turned ON and RAM clear is executed, as in the case where the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. You can return to a situation where you can play games. The main side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the twelfth modification will be described below.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] As shown in FIG. 77, in the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the 12th modification, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines whether the gaming stop flag is ON ( S101). As described above, the game stop flag is turned ON when the over-winning ball prevention function is activated or when illegal magnetism is detected. In this way, if the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S101), the processes of steps S102 to S113 are executed as described above. Note that "the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more" or "it is determined that there is illegal magnetism (specific abnormality)" corresponds to "the predetermined stopping condition is satisfied."

On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing in steps S102 to S113 is passed, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 executes ball rental control stop processing (S115), and proceeds to step S114. In the ball lending control stop process (S115), the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a ball lending stop command to the payout control board 170. Thereby, when the payout control board 170 receives the ball lending stop command from the main control board 100, the payout control microcomputer 171 controls the ball lending of game balls to be impossible based on the ball lending stop command. As a result, even if a player or the like presses the ball lending button 62, ball lending will not be executed. Note that the state in which ball lending cannot be performed continues as long as the game is controlled to be impossible (as long as the game stop flag is ON). Therefore, if the RAM is cleared after that and the game is returned to a state where the game can be executed (if the game stop flag is turned OFF), the state where the ball lending can be performed is returned.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 171 transmits a ball lending stop signal to the balance display board 172 based on the reception of the ball lending stop command. As a result, the balance display board 172 displays, on the balance display section 61, a number corresponding to the number of game balls that could be lent before the game was controlled to be unplayable, as shown in FIG. 78(A). This state and the state where "E" indicating that ball lending is not possible, as shown in FIG. 78(B), are alternately repeated every 3 seconds. In this way, a player or the like who sees "E" indicating that ball lending is not possible on the balance display section 61 can be made aware that ball lending is not possible.

Further, in the ball lending control stop processing (S115) shown in FIG. 77, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a ball lending impossible production command to the production control board 120. As a result, when the performance control board 120 receives the ball rental impossible performance command from the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the ball rental impossible notification performance to notify that ball rental is impossible. Here, the ball rental not possible notification performance when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated and the ball rental not possible notification performance when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained separately.

In FIG. 79(A), a notification effect indicating that balls cannot be rented is shown when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated. As shown in FIG. 79(A), a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. At this time, as a ball rental not possible notification effect, a ball rental not possible notification image TK indicating "Ball rental not possible" is displayed on the display screen 50a. In this way, it is possible to make a player who is unable to play a game due to the activation of the over-winning ball prevention function strongly aware that ball lending is not possible by displaying the ball lending not possible notification image TK. Further, in conjunction with the ball rental not possible notification performance, a card removal promotion performance is executed on the display screen 50a. In the card removal promotion effect, a card removal promotion image TB indicating "Press the return button and take out the card" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to press the return button 63 and take out the card containing information on the number of game balls that could be lent before the game was controlled to be unexecutable from the card unit CU. be.

In FIG. 79(B), a ball rental not possible notification effect is shown when illegal magnetism is detected. As shown in FIG. 79(B), a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. At this time, similar to the case shown in FIG. 79(A), the ball rental not possible notification effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to make a player who is unable to play a game due to detection of illegal magnetism strongly aware that ball lending is not possible by displaying the ball lending not possible notification image TK. Also, similar to the case shown in FIG. 79(A), a card removal promotion effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to press the return button 63 and take out the card containing information on the number of game balls that could be lent before the game was controlled to be unexecutable from the card unit CU. be.

In this twelfth modification, if the game is controlled to be impossible to play, the player cannot continue playing the game. At this time, if the player presses the ball lending button 62 and lends out the game balls, the player who cannot play the game will have gained unnecessary balls, resulting in a loss. Resulting in. Therefore, after the game becomes impossible to play, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed, the ball lending of game balls is not executed, thereby preventing a situation in which the player suffers a loss. is possible.

Further, in the twelfth modification, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated based on the difference in the number of balls being 80,000 or more, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. In this case, the player cannot continue playing the game, so the player stops playing the game and leaves the pachinko game machine PY1. If the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, it is necessary to clear the RAM in order to return to a situation where the game can be played. On the day when the prize ball prevention function is activated, the game remains in a state where it is impossible to play. Therefore, there is a possibility that another player who does not know that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated may try to press the ball lending button 62 on the pachinko game machine PY1 and start playing the game. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed, the ball lending of game balls is not executed, so that players who do not fully understand the excessive prize ball prevention function can avoid losses. It is possible to prevent such situations.

In particular, in the case of a popular pachinko game machine, the player presses the ball lending button 62 to reserve the pachinko machine (secure the machine) with a certain amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 34. The reality is that he is now looking for another pachinko machine. Under such circumstances, there is a possibility that a player may try to secure a machine by pressing the ball lending button 62 on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the over-winning ball prevention function has been activated. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed, the ball lending of game balls is not executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the table from being secured.

Furthermore, in the twelfth modification, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game is controlled to be impossible to play. In this case, in order to return to a state where the game can be played, it is necessary to clear the RAM, and the employees of the gaming parlor may not clear the RAM for a while. In this case, there is a risk that a player who does not understand that the game cannot be played on the pachinko game machine PY1 may try to press the ball lending button 62 to start the game. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed, the ball lending of game balls is not executed, so that players who do not fully understand that they cannot play the game can suffer losses. It is possible to prevent such situations.

In addition, in the twelfth modification, as shown in FIG. 1, the balance display section 61 (notification means) displays a number (100) corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented, so that ball lending can be executed. It shows that there is. Here, when the balance display section 61 is controlled so that the game cannot be executed, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the balance display section 61 displays "E" to indicate that the ball lending is impossible. In this way, by showing the player "E" indicating that ball lending is not possible on the balance display section 61, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the situation in which ball lending cannot be performed.

<13th modification example>
In the eleventh modification, only the employees of the gaming hall can substantially set the performance items related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance. On the other hand, in the thirteenth modification, the player is configured to be able to set performance matters related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance. Specifically, in the thirteenth modification, the player can set the above-mentioned effects while waiting for a customer where the variable display of special symbols is not being executed. Hereinafter, based on FIG. 80, a case where the player sets the above-mentioned performance items will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), when in the customer waiting state, a setting screen G101 for making settings regarding the performance of the pachinko game machine PY1 can be displayed on the display screen 50a as a customer waiting performance. . As described above, the setting screen G101 is displayed when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 shown in FIG. 18 (A-1) is being displayed. While the setting screen G101 shown in FIG. 80(A) is displayed, when the player moves the cursor to "effect settings" and presses the normal button 40, the display screen 50a is displayed as shown in FIG. 80(B). , the effect setting image FX is displayed. This effect setting image FX is an image similar to the initial function setting image FS (see FIG. 75(B)) described in the eleventh modification.

Therefore, while displaying the performance setting image FX shown in FIG. When the button is pressed, an over-prize ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX shown in FIG. 80(C) can be displayed. Then, while displaying this over-prized ball abnormality notice performance setting image SX, performance matters related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance can be set. On the other hand, while displaying the performance setting image FX shown in FIG. When pressed, the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 80(D) can be displayed. Then, while the residual ball number notification performance setting image SY is displayed, performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance can be set.

In this 13th modification, while waiting for a customer, the player operates the normal button 40 and the select button while the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is displayed. Based on this, it is possible to set performance matters related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance. In particular, the number of differential balls that triggers the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance can be arbitrarily set. In this way, the player can appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance.

In the thirteenth modification, the player can set whether or not to execute the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance as a performance item related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance. Therefore, if the player desires that the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance not be executed, it is possible to prevent the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance from being executed. In this way, the player can appropriately adjust whether or not to execute the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance according to his/her own selection.

<Other variations>
In the above form, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but the high probability is determined based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which transition to a probability state is determined. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification example (excluding the second modification example), it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the number of changes in the special symbol), but once the high probability state is controlled. Even if it is configured as a gaming machine (a so-called variable loop type machine) in which control continues to a high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game, or a falling machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). good.

In the above-mentioned form and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the upper limit number of special figures 1 reservation was 4 pieces, and the upper limit number of special figures 2 reservations was 4 pieces. However, the upper limit number of special figure 1 reservations and the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations are not limited to four, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the excessive winning ball prevention function is activated is when the high-accuracy high-base state ends or when the low-accuracy high-base state ends. However, the over-winning ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive game period)" ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or at the timing when the customer waiting state continues for a certain fixed period of time. Further, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, as in the seventh modification. For example, in a gaming machine that can execute small winning games, if the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the small winning game state (the state in which the small winning game is being executed, the advantageous gaming state) ends, the over-winning A ball prevention function may be activated. In this case, for example, due to the so-called small winning rush state (such as a high probability low base state in which small winning games are executed more frequently than in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is likely to enter the big winning hole by executing the small winning games). When the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more and the small winning game state ends or the high probability low base state ends, the over winning ball prevention function may be activated. Furthermore, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In the above embodiment, the first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed (see FIG. 26(A)), or the second condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the reset condition (see FIG. 26(B)) is satisfied, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, as shown in FIG. The difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the difference in number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive play period)" ends, so only if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number) during one rush state. , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-accuracy, high-base state and the low-accuracy, high-base state, the number of differential balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state or a high-accuracy, low-base state to a normal gaming state. . Further, the number of differential balls may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 81(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-mentioned specific time is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power off and on (turning the power back on).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 am), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference in the number of balls without forcing the employees of the gaming hall to perform any operations. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 a.m., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of differential balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

In the above embodiment, the measured number of differential balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured number of difference balls on the display 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of differential balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and the number of differential balls is 50,001 to 70,000. (second range), the second mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and when the difference in the number of balls is between 70,001 and 80,000 (third range), the second mode is displayed. The third aspect may be displayed on the appliance 8 or 7 segment display 300. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of differential balls (or information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls) to the production control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 displays the image. The difference in the number of balls may be displayed on a display means such as the device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of prize balls that have been paid out (or the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out) and information on detection by the discharge port sensor to the performance control board 120. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference number of balls based on this information, and thereby display the difference number of balls on a display means such as the image display device 50. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not directly indicate the number of difference balls, but uses the light emission mode (emission color) of the light emitting means (board lamp 54, frame lamp 53) to indicate the number of difference balls (the number of difference balls). range) may also be indicated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference number of balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in a modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, the information on the difference number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections), and is stored in the four storage areas of the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, respectively. . The first storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time. The second storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) until when the power was turned off last time. The third storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before. The 4th (N)th storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two previous times (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two previous times. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth storage area is erased. Note that the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if RAM clear is executed.

In this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The difference number of balls stored in the second storage area is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300, switching sequentially in units of 1,000 balls. Ru. Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 82(A), for example, "bL36" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Subsequently, on the 7-segment display 300, for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 82(E). This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time is 20,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls between when the power was turned on last time (one time before) and when the power was turned off last time is "0". Note that if the total number of fired balls is greater than the total number of prized balls and the difference in the number of balls is smaller than "0", "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on the second time before (two times ago) to when the power was turned off the second time before the previous time was 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before last (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two times before last was 48,000. Thereafter, FIGS. 66(A) to 66(H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the above-mentioned modification, each time the power is turned OFF and ON (re-energized), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area is is now deleted. However, each time RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls may be shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area may be deleted. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined time (for example, 9 a.m.), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference in the number of balls may be deleted. Note that N described above can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more. Further, although the difference in number of balls is displayed in units of 1,000 balls, it may be displayed in units of 10 balls, 100 balls, or 10,000 balls.

In the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 82, the display of the difference number of balls was automatically switched every 5 seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference number of balls may be changed by operating a predetermined operating means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the difference number of balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means.

In the above embodiment, when the number of differential balls exceeds 70,000 (preliminary standard number, specified number), the performance mode shown in FIG. 28(A) indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 70,000") or a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the panel lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53 indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. It may also be shown as follows. Furthermore, as the number of differential balls increases, it may be shown that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the above embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 (reference number), the effect mode shown in FIG. 28(B) shows a situation where the game can be stopped. However, the presentation mode indicating a situation where the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a situation in which the game may be stopped may be indicated by a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 80,000") or by a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53. good.

In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A) indicates a situation in which the game cannot be executed. However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "The game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display screen 50a, or a special sound (for example, "The game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

In the above embodiment, even if RAM clearing is executed, the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c is not deleted. However, even if the information on the difference number of balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erase storage section) of the gaming RAM 104, and when the RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference number of balls is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include that RAM clearing is executed, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is only that RAM clearing is performed. , you can just turn the power back on.

In the above embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 32), but also causes the game ball to be fired. The launch control processing (processing of step 109, see FIG. 32) was also stopped. However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the firing control process. However, in this case, as explained in the fifth modification, even if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, when the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball will flow down the game area 6. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 101 stops both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible for the player to quickly understand the situation where the game cannot be executed. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, at the timing when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball may still be flowing down the game area 6, and the game ball may enter the various prize openings and award the player a prize. There is a problem that balls can be applied. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of balls fired based on the detection by the discharge port sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors that detect winnings in various winning holes (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a), , the total number of balls fired may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the total The number of balls fired may be counted.

In the above embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000, the over-prize ball preview image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(A). However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, the game becomes unplayable under the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more in customer waiting performances, performances during jackpot games (e.g. ending performances), preview performances accompanying variable performances, etc. You may perform a performance that explains what will happen. This is because such an effect allows players and employees of the gaming parlor to be informed in advance that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a function to prevent over-winning balls.

In the above embodiment, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the difference number of balls in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, even if the RAM is cleared, the total prize Information on the number of pitches, total number of balls fired, and difference number of balls will not be deleted. However, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of differential balls in a nonvolatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, Even if RAM clearing is executed, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls may not be deleted.

In the above embodiment, the number of differential balls is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference number of balls may start from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state). In this case, the negative difference in the number of balls (that is, the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function to be the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 separately counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls, and calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls. However, the number of difference balls may be measured (counted) using only a difference ball counter for counting the number of difference balls. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a game ball is fired (every time the discharge port sensor detects the ball), the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the number of differential balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. In this case, the value of the difference ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more without becoming negative. By doing so, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function to be substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above form, when the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 or more, the game stop notice image KH shown in FIG. It was predicted that it would become impossible to carry out. However, the performance mode of the game-unavailability notice performance is not limited to that shown in FIG. 28(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the unplayable notice effect does not indicate at what timing the game will be controlled to become unplayable (at what timing the excessive prize ball prevention function will be activated), but will simply cause the game to be controlled to become unplayable later. It can also be used as a performance to show that. In addition, the game-unavailability warning effect may include outputting a game-impossible warning sound from the speaker 52 (for example, a voice that says "The game will soon become unplayable"), or setting the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 to emit a game-impossible warning sound ( For example, it may be an effect in which the light is emitted in a light emitting mode in which all the lights are turned on and all the lights are turned off. The unplayable notice effect may be executed at any timing as long as the number of differential balls is 80,000 or more (standard number), and it may continue to be executed until the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, or it may be executed at random timing. It may be configured to be executed multiple times.

In the above form, when the number of difference balls becomes 70,000 (specific number) or more, the advance game disablement notice effect shown in FIG. When this happens, the next jackpot announcement performance shown in FIG. 66(B) and the run-up performance shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 68(B) are executed, and in the ninth modification, the difference number of balls is 79550 or more. Then, the next jackpot achievement suggestion performance shown in FIG. 72(C) and the mini next jackpot achievement suggestion performance shown in FIG. 72(D) were executed. However, the performance mode of each of the above-mentioned performances (advance preview performances) is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the advance notice performance may be such that the speaker 52 emits an unplayable warning sound (for example, "The number of difference balls has reached 〇〇〇〇〇 (specific number). If the number of difference balls increases by (standard number - specific number), the game will start. It is also possible to create an effect that outputs a voice saying "This will become impossible to execute," or an effect that causes all the frame lamps 53 and board lamps 54 to emit red light (a special light emitting mode). Furthermore, the performance form of the advance notice performance is not limited to directly foretelling that the game will become impossible to play, as shown in FIGS. 28(A) and 66(B); A special dedicated image that indirectly suggests this may be displayed, or a special dedicated sound may be output. For example, only when the difference in the number of balls is 78,500 (a specific number) or more, a special exclusive character image or a special exclusive item image is displayed to indirectly suggest that the game cannot be played. You can also do it. Further, the specific number that is the trigger for starting the advance preview performance is not limited to 70,000, 785,000, and 79,550, and may be, for example, 60,000, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the specific number that is the trigger for starting the advance notice performance is set to be awardable in jackpot games X, Y, and Z based on the winning of three jackpot symbols X, Y, and Z from the standard number (80,000). It may also be a value (79050) obtained by subtracting the average value (950) of the number of prize balls. Also, the execution timing of the advance notice effect can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be executed only during the hit suggestion effect (during the display of the SP reach background image G113 showing that the main character is happy after winning the battle). It may be executed each time the performance mode is switched, or each time a predetermined variable number of times is executed, or it may be executed at random timing by lottery.

In the above embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 72k (firing operation means) after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the operation alerting effect shown in FIG. 51(B) or FIG. 52(B) ( (attention-raising performance) was carried out. Further, in the fifth modification, if the player touches the handle 72k after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the contact attention-calling performance (attention-calling performance) shown in FIG. 61(B) or FIG. 62(B) was executed. However, the performance mode of the attention-calling performance is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41 (performance operation means) after the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, an attention-calling performance may be executed.

In the first modification described above, as shown in FIG. 53, the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 4 after transitioning to the normal gaming state (with special symbol 2 remaining pending). When executed twice, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the remaining reservation special performance (special performance) shown in FIG. 54 is ended. However, if the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed 4 times after transitioning to the normal gaming state, When the prevention function is activated, the remaining reservation special performance (special performance) shown in FIG. 54 may be terminated. Note that the number of times described above is not limited to four times, and may be, for example, one time, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second modification described above, when the difference in the number of balls exceeds 80,000, instead of the round effect shown in FIG. 55(A), a round alternative effect (alternative effect) shown in FIG. 55(B) is executed. However, the performance mode of the round alternative performance is not limited to that shown in FIG. 55(B), and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. Furthermore, when the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, instead of the jackpot opening effect shown in FIG. 18 (C-1), an alternative jackpot opening effect that suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is executed. good. Furthermore, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, instead of the jackpot ending effect shown in Figure 18 (C-3), an alternative jackpot ending effect is executed which suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. good.

In the second modification described above, when the difference in the number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, the time-saving mode alternative performance (alternative performance) shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed instead of the time-saving mode performance shown in FIG. 18(B-5). It was done. However, the performance mode of the time-saving mode alternative performance is not limited to that shown in FIG. 55(C), and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In addition, in the sixth modification described above, when the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more, instead of the probability variation mode performance shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), the probability variation mode alternative performance (alternative production) shown in FIG. 63(C) is performed. It has been executed. However, the presentation mode of the alternate probability mode presentation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63(C), and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the third modification described above, as shown in FIG. 57, the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, and the number of changes in the special symbol is executed 30 times (specified number of times) after transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state. When this happens (when a predetermined condition is met), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. However, the specified number of times described above is not limited to 30 times, and may be, for example, 1 time or 100 times, and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, after the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the game shifts to the normal game state, the over-winning ball prevention function may be activated under conditions unrelated to the number of changes in the special symbols. For example, after transitioning to the normal gaming state, the system may transition to the customer waiting state, or when a certain predetermined time has elapsed after shifting to the normal gaming state, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated.

In the third modification described above, as shown in FIG. 57, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the number of variations of the special symbol is executed 30 times (the specified number of times) after transitioning to the normal gaming state, When the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the special performance (special performance) after the normal transition shown in FIG. 58 is terminated. Here, the prescribed number of times (30) mentioned above means the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes, but it may be only the number of times the first special symbol changes. , may mean only the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. In addition, the performance mode of the special performance is not limited to the performance mode of the special performance after normal transition shown in FIG. It is possible to change the presentation mode as appropriate.

In the above embodiments, the fifth modification, and the twelfth modification, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is illegal magnetism (specific abnormality), it controls the game to be impossible. However, the specific abnormality is not limited to incorrect magnetism, but may also be incorrect radio waves, incorrect vibration, ball clogging, control errors (bugs), etc., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-mentioned eighth modification, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number) or more, the run-up effect is executed after the next jackpot arrival preview effect is executed. However, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number) or more, the next jackpot arrival preview effect may not be executed, and only the run-up effect may be executed. In addition, the production mode of the running performance is not limited to the production mode shown in Figs. 66(C) to 68(B), and the process in which the number of differential balls goes from 78,500 (specific number) to 80,000 (standard number) is If it is known, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, a process in which the number of difference balls goes from 78,500 (specific number) to 80,000 (standard number) by a meter effect in which the meter accumulates as the number of difference balls increases, or a storage effect in which a predetermined object is stored as the number of difference balls increases. It may also be shown as follows.

In the eighth modification described above, when the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number) or more, the performance suggesting that the standard number has been reached (the next jackpot announcement performance and the run-up performance) is executed until the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 or more. , When the difference in the number of balls reached 80,000 or more, the blessing performance shown in FIG. 68(C) was performed. However, when the number of difference balls exceeds a certain number, a series of effects that can be recognized as a series are executed asynchronously (for example, a series of (displaying a video). This allows players to recognize that the process from when the difference in number of balls reaches a certain number to when the game is stopped is a series of events, making the process of becoming unable to play feel more natural. It is.

In the eighth modification described above, after the difference in the number of balls reaches 78,500 (specific number) or more, as a reduction hit suggestion effect, the main character wins the battle and is happy as shown in FIG. 67(D). The mini SP reach background image g113 indicating that the mini SP reach is present is displayed. However, the performance mode of the reduction hit suggestion performance is not limited to the above-mentioned one (mini SP reach background image g113), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "V" may be displayed in the lower right display area 51b. In addition, when displaying "V" in the lower right display area 51b, it is preferable that the machine be a so-called type 1 type 2 gaming machine or a type 2 gaming machine.

In the eighth modification described above, there are three types of jackpots: jackpot symbol The specific number that becomes the starting trigger was the value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) set to be awardable in the jackpot game Z from the reference number (80000). However, the specific number that triggers the start of the advance notice performance (standard number arrival notice performance) is set to be available from the standard number (80000) in the jackpot game The number of prize balls (750) that is available is subtracted (79250), or the number of prize balls that can be awarded in jackpot game Y (600) when winning a jackpot in the lottery of special drawing 1 is subtracted. It may also be a value (79400). Furthermore, the types of jackpots are not limited to three types as in the eighth modification (see Figure 12(B)) or four types as in the ninth and tenth modifications (see Figure 69). , one type, two types, five or more types, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-mentioned 11th modification and 13th modification, whether or not to execute the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance, the number of differential balls that trigger the start of the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance, and whether to perform the residual ball number notification performance. , Whether or not to perform the residual ball number notification performance at the opening of the jackpot game, whether or not to perform the residual ball number notification performance in the round game of the jackpot game, and whether or not to perform the residual ball number notification performance at the ending of the jackpot game. Whether to execute it or not, whether to execute the residual ball number notification effect every time the variation effect is executed, whether to execute the residual ball number notification effect every time the variation effect is executed five times or not. , it was possible to set whether or not to prevent the residual ball number notification effect from being executed during the variable effect. However, the effects that can be set are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, when the number of differential balls exceeds 80,000 (reference number), a game-disabled notice effect (display of the game stop notice image shown in FIG. 28(B)) is executed, which foretells that the game will become impossible. Therefore, it may be possible to set whether or not to execute this game-unavailability notice effect. Alternatively, the residual ball number notification performance can be set to be executed regardless of the difference number of balls, or the residual ball number notification performance (advance notice performance) can be set to be performed during the customer waiting performance. Also good. Alternatively, it may be possible to arbitrarily set how many variations the residual ball number notification effect is executed.

In the 11th and 13th variations described above, by operating the normal button 40 and the select button (operation means), the production matters related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice production and the production related to the residual ball number notification production. It was possible to set items. However, the operation means for setting the performance items is not limited to the normal button 40 and the select button (operation means), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a dedicated operating means is provided that does not involve any production at all, but is used to set production matters related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice production and production matters related to the residual ball number notification production. It's okay.

In the above-mentioned eleventh modification, it was possible to set performance items related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance and performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance on the condition that RAM clearing was executed. However, it may be possible to set performance items related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance simply by turning on the power. Alternatively, on the condition that the gaming machine frame 2 is opened, it may be possible to set performance items related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance.

In the above-mentioned 13th modification, when the player is in the customer waiting state, it is possible to set performance items related to the excessive prize ball abnormality notice performance and performance items related to the residual ball number notification performance. However, even while the variable performance is being executed, performance matters related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance and performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance may be set.

In the above-described twelfth modification, when the game is controlled to be unplayable, the balance display section 61 (display means) displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that could be lent (FIG. 78(A) (see FIG. 78(B)) and a state in which "E" indicating that ball lending is not possible (see FIG. 78(B)) are alternately repeated every 3 seconds. However, when the game is controlled to be impossible, the balance display section 61 may simply display "E" indicating that ball lending is impossible. Note that the display mode indicating that ball lending is not possible is not limited to "E" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the balance display section 61 may display "888" (all lights on) to indicate that ball lending is not possible. Note that the display means for indicating that ball lending is executable and indicating that ball lending is not executable is not limited to the balance display section 61, but may be the image display device 50 or a sub-liquid crystal display. It may also be a device or the like.

In the above-mentioned twelfth modification, when the game is controlled to be impossible, a ball lending not possible notification effect (see FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B)) indicating that ball lending is not possible is executed. did. However, the performance mode of the ball rental unavailable notification performance is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as a performance mode for notifying the player that balls cannot be rented, the speaker 52 may output a voice saying "Balls cannot be rented," or the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 may be made to emit light in a specific light emitting manner.

In the above-described twelfth modification, when the game is controlled to be impossible to play, a card return suggestion effect (see FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B)) is executed to prompt the player to take out the card. However, the performance mode of the card return suggestion performance is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as a production mode for suggesting a card return, the speaker 52 may output a voice saying "Press the return button and take out the card," or the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 may be made to emit light in a specific light emission mode. Also good.

In the above-mentioned form and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is 80,000 (standard number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number) that is the standard for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, or 120,000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-mentioned form and each of the above-described modifications, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. However, from the viewpoint of not awarding excessive prize balls, the specific measurement number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player. For example, the specific measured number may be the number of differential balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state or a certain period such as a consecutive game period. For example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. It's okay. Further, for example, the specific measurement number may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period.

In the above-mentioned embodiments and the above-mentioned variations, the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured as a non-enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1. It had been. However, the pachinko game machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside the machine can circulate and enter the game area again after flowing down the game area. In this case, a 7-segment display is arranged on a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170. Therefore, it may be possible to display the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) on this 7-segment display. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 83, a 6-digit 7-segment display 200 that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door, and this 7-segment display 200 displays the number of balls difference (specific measurement number). It may also be possible to display the .

In the above-mentioned form and each modification, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable based on the difference in the number of balls being 80,000 (reference number) or more. However, although the game control microcomputer 101 measures (counts) the number of difference balls, it may be configured not to control the game so that it cannot be executed based on the number of difference balls. Note that in this specification, "measurement" has the same meaning as counting or counting.

12. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments In the above embodiments, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention related to means A1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) that is advantageous for the player ends (see FIG. 25), the game ends. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping the game control process and the firing control process).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention related to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The game control means is
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) shifts to the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention related to means A3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state occurs, the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) is completed in the normal gaming state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game so that it cannot be played (see FIG. 53).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the winning determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number of times. In this case, the game is considered to be a substantially advantageous gaming state until a predetermined number of pending hit determination processes are completed in the normal gaming state, and when the substantially advantageous gaming state ends, the game is stopped. Is possible.

The invention related to means A4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
Equipped with a ball entry port (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling the game ball to enter the ball entry easy state (high base state) in which the game ball enters the ball entry hole more easily than the normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball entry state (high base state).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the ball entry easy state in which the game ball enters the entry hole more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unplayable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the easy-to-enter state ends.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means A1 to A4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , is different in that when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means B>
The invention related to means B1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the firing control process are stopped) (see FIG. 25);
Based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on (a first reset condition in which the special reset switch 181 is pressed, a second reset condition in which the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specified number of measurements is determined. This is a gaming machine characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 26(A) and 26(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing before the specific measured number reaches the reference number, and a player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the specific measurement number is erased based on the satisfaction of the reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

The invention related to means B2 is:
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 26(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, for example, after a certain player finishes playing the game, an employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, thereby erasing the specific measurement number. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to avoid stopping the game immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means B3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The game control means can control the game to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the winning determination process;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 26(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, the specific number of measurements is erased, assuming that the player has changed. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to avoid stopping the game immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means B4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is a transition from an advantageous gaming state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state (see FIG. 81(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the player shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific measurement number is erased. In this way, once the situation where the advantageous gaming state continues ends, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention related to means B5 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the normal gaming state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 65(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time, it means that a situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by erasing the specific measured number, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means B1 to B5 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement is performed based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. They differ in that they erase numbers. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means C>
The invention related to means C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with an operable specific operating means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing are stopped);
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measured number. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when an employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, the game information related to the game is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been measured is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the gaming state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the specific measurement number from being erased.

The invention related to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific measurement number can be erased based on the operation of the special operation means (see FIG. 26(A)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific measurement number is erased by the gaming parlor employee operating the special operation means. Thereby, even if the gaming state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the gaming parlor can erase the specific measured number at any timing.

The invention related to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2,
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 a.m.), the specific measurement number can be deleted.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the specific measurement number is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the specific number of measurements without requiring an employee of the game parlor to perform any operation.

The invention related to means C4 is
In the gaming machine described in means C1 to means C4,
The game control means is
The specific measurement numbers are stored in order by dividing them into predetermined periods from the first to the N(4)th period (period from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off),
In conjunction with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is changed to the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined periods. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified measurement number is shifted as shown in FIG.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to store specific measured numbers for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth. Then, as the specific measurement number for the Nth predetermined period is deleted, the specific measurement number for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is changed to the specific measurement number for the second to Nth predetermined period. Shifted as a measurement number. Then, measurement of the specific measurement number for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the specific measurement number for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth without requiring an employee of the game parlor to operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means C1 to C4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measured number exceeding a predetermined reference number, and game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. The difference is that while it erases the specific number of measurements taken, it does not erase the specific number of measurements taken. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means D>
The invention related to means D1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performances,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped),
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (jackpot gaming state and high probability high base state), an advantageous effect (round effect shown in FIG. 18 (C-2) and FIG. 18 While it is possible to execute the variable mode performance shown in (B-4),
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number in the advantageous gaming state, an alternative presentation is performed in place of the advantageous presentation (the round alternative presentation shown in FIG. 63(B) and the variable mode alternative presentation shown in FIG. 63(C)). This is a gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if an advantageous performance is executed when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state, there is a risk of giving the player the impression that the game can still be continued. Therefore, at this time, by performing an alternative performance in place of the advantageous performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played.

The invention related to means D2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means D1,
The game control means is
A game characterized in that when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state and high probability high base state) ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable (see FIG. 25). It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number, the game will not become impossible to execute as long as the game is in an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in the advantageous gaming state, if the advantageous effect is still being executed, there is a risk that the player may be misled into thinking that the specific measured number is not yet equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, in an advantageous gaming state, if the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number, an alternative effect is executed in place of the advantageous effect, allowing the player to play while the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number. It is possible to make sure that you understand what is happening.

The invention related to means D3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means D2,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game when it is determined to be a win by a winning determination process,
The advantageous gaming state (the gaming state in the advantageous period shown in FIG. 53 (jackpot gaming state, high base state, normal gaming state in the special drawing 2 lottery) is such that the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, When the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4) when transitioning to the normal gaming state is completed in the normal gaming state, it ends,
The advantageous performance is a performance (remaining performance shown in FIG. 56) that is executed when the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4) when the normal gaming state is entered is completed in the normal gaming state. This gaming machine is characterized in that it includes a hold-alternative special performance).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the game cannot be executed until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number of times when the state shifts to the normal gaming state is completed. do not become. Here, if the state shifts to the normal gaming state and the advantageous performance continues to be executed, there is a risk that the player will be misled into thinking that the specific measured number is not yet equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, by executing an alternative performance in place of the advantageous performance after transitioning to the normal gaming state, it is possible to ensure that the player understands that the specific measured number is greater than or equal to the reference number. be.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means D1 to D3 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means is capable of controlling the specific measured number to be less than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The difference is that when this is the case, an advantageous presentation can be executed, while when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state, an alternative presentation can be executed in place of the advantageous presentation. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means E>
The invention related to means E1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) and a predetermined end condition is met in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 30 after transitioning to the normal gaming state). Then, (see FIG. 57), this is a gaming machine characterized by controlling the game so that it cannot be executed (stopping the game control process and the firing control process).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous situation for the player, and there is no particular disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention related to means E2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means is capable of variably displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination condition is that the variable display of the identification symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after transitioning to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 57). be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the variable display of the identification symbol is executed a specified number of times after transitioning to the normal gaming state, the game cannot be executed. become. In this way, the player is able to continue playing the game for a while until the variable display of the identification symbols is executed a specified number of times even if the game transitions to the normal gaming state.

The invention related to means E3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means E2,
Equipped with a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number, the special effect (Fig. 58 (B) (C) ) can be executed (dedicated performance after normal transition),
Even when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the special performance can be performed from the time the state shifts to the normal gaming state until the variable display of the identification symbol is performed the specified number of times (30 times). This is a gaming machine that features:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is less than the standard number, the special performance can be enjoyed from the time the transition to the normal gaming state until the variable display of the identification symbol is executed a specified number of times. It is possible to do so. On the other hand, even when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to enjoy the special effect from the time the game enters the normal gaming state until the variable display of the identification symbol is executed a specified number of times. . In this way, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, the special effect before the game becomes unplayable is executed as is, and the timing when the game becomes unplayable and the special effect are changed. It is possible to match the end timing of

The invention related to means E4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) when it is determined to be a win by the hit determination process,
The termination condition is that a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the hit determination processes that have been suspended when the game transitions to the normal game state are completed in the normal game state (see FIG. 53). It is a gaming machine with

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, the hit determination process that has been suspended for a predetermined number of times when the normal gaming state is entered is performed in the normal gaming state. Once consumed, the game becomes unplayable. In this way, the player can continue playing the game for a while until the predetermined number of pending hit determination processes are completed, even if the game transitions to the normal gaming state.

The invention related to means E5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E4,
Equipped with a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than the reference number, the advantageous performance (as shown in FIG. 54 It is possible to perform a special performance (remaining reservation special performance shown),
Even when the specific measurement number is greater than or equal to the reference number, the advantageous effect (see FIG. This gaming machine is characterized in that it can execute the remaining reservation special effect shown in 54.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is less than the reference number, the hit determination process that was suspended for a predetermined number of times when the normal gaming state was entered is changed to the normal gaming state. It is possible to enjoy the advantageous effect until it is consumed. On the other hand, even if the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls is greater than or equal to the reference number, the advantageous state will continue until the hit determination process that was suspended for a predetermined number of times when the game transitions to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. It is possible to enjoy the performance to the fullest. In this way, even if the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, the advantageous effect before the game becomes impossible to execute is executed as is, and the timing when the game becomes impossible to execute and the advantageous effect It is possible to match the end timing of

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means E1 to E5 is such that the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player in the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , is different in that when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means F>
The invention related to means F1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performances,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process are stopped);
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number exceeds the reference number, it is possible to execute a game disable notice effect (display of a game stop notice image shown in FIG. 28(B)) that foretells that the game will become impossible. It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a game-disabled notice effect is executed to foretell that the game will become impossible. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the game will become impossible to play, and can prevent a situation where the player suddenly becomes unable to play the game and becomes confused.

The invention related to means F2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means F1,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number reaches or exceeds the pre-standard number (70000) which is less than the reference number, a pre-game disablement notice effect (shown in FIG. 28(A)) that foretells that the specific measurement number is approaching the reference number This gaming machine is characterized in that it is capable of displaying an over-prize ball preview image KY.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the pre-standard number, a pre-game disablement notice effect is executed to foretell that the specific measured number is approaching the reference number. Thereafter, when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a game-disabled notice effect is executed that foretells that the game will become impossible. In this way, it is possible for the player to understand in advance the situation in which the game becomes impossible, step by step, and to make it easier for the player to understand the situation.

The invention related to means F3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means F1 or means F2,
The game control means controls the game to be unexecutable when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and an advantageous gaming state (high base state) advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 25). This is a gaming machine with special features.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In this way, it is possible for the player to stop the game at a convenient timing.

The invention related to means F4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means F3,
The game impossibility notice performance is a performance that foretells that the game will become impossible to execute when the advantageous gaming state ends (a performance that indicates "the game ends when the high base state ends," see FIG. 28(B)). This is a gaming machine with special features.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game disablement notice performance provides a notice that the game will become impossible when the advantageous gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately know when he or she will no longer be able to play the game.

The invention related to means F5 is:
In the gaming machine according to means F1 or means F2,
The game control means is capable of variably displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The game impossibility notice performance is characterized in that it is a performance that shows the number of fluctuation displays of the identification symbol until the game becomes impossible to play (display of the remaining number of game cancellations image LN1 shown in FIG. 56(B)). It is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls exceeds the reference number, the game disablement notice effect allows the player to predict the number of times the identifying symbol will be displayed in a variable manner until the game becomes impossible. grasp. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that each time the variable display of the identification symbols is executed, the player is gradually approaching a situation where the game cannot be played.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means F1 to F4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number; The difference is that it is possible to execute a game-disabled notice effect that foretells that the game will become unavailable. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means G>
The invention related to means G1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production;
A game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a firing operation means (handle 72k) capable of firing a game ball based on an operation,
The game control means controls the game to be unexecutable when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied (for example, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more),
When the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, the performance control means performs an attention-calling performance (the operation shown in FIG. 51(B) or FIG. 52(B)) to call attention based on the contact with the firing operation means. This gaming machine is characterized in that it can execute an attention-calling performance (a contact attention-calling performance shown in FIG. 61(B) or FIG. 62(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when a predetermined stopping condition is satisfied, the game becomes impossible to play. At this time, the player may operate the firing operation means without fully understanding the situation in which the game is no longer playable. In this case, an attention-calling performance is performed to call attention to the situation. In this way, it is possible to make sure that the player who has touched the firing operation means understands that the game cannot be played.

The invention related to means G2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means G1,
The game machine is characterized in that the firing operation means is capable of firing a game ball even when the game is controlled to be impossible to execute (the firing control process (S109) is not canceled).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, when the player operates the firing operation means, the game ball is fired. Therefore, the player may misunderstand that he or she can play the game. Therefore, by executing the attention-calling effect, it is possible to make the player reliably understand that the game cannot be played.

The invention related to means G3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number (difference ball number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the stop condition includes that the specific measured number becomes a predetermined reference number (80,000) or more.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, even if the player operates the firing operation means when the game cannot be played, the attention-calling performance makes it possible for the player to surely understand that the game cannot be played.

The invention related to means G4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means is capable of determining whether there is a specific abnormality (illegal magnetism) (capable of executing error processing (S111)),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the stopping condition includes that the gaming control means determines that the specific abnormality exists.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the gaming control means determines that there is a specific abnormality, the gaming becomes impossible to execute. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing in a situation where there is a specific abnormality. Furthermore, even if the player operates the firing operation means when the game cannot be played, the attention-calling performance makes it possible for the player to surely understand that the game cannot be played.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-070611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables the game. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be impossible to play, the player cannot continue playing the game. However, after the game is controlled to be unplayable, the player may operate the firing operation means without fully grasping the situation that makes the game unplayable. Therefore, the invention related to means G1 to G4 provides a gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2017-070611, in which the effect control means is configured to prevent contact with the firing operation means when the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. The difference is that it is possible to perform an attention-calling performance based on the above-mentioned information. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that allows a player who comes into contact with the firing operation means to reliably understand that the game cannot be played. It is possible.

<Means H>
The invention related to means H1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performances,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, the game can be controlled to be unplayable (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped),
The performance control means is
When the specific measured number is less than a specific number (78500) that is smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance (standard number attainment notice performance (next jackpot arrival notice performance and run-up performance)) is performed;
A game characterized in that the advance notice performance (standard number attainment notice performance (next jackpot arrival notice performance and run-up performance)) can be executed based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than the specific number. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, if the player suddenly becomes unable to play the game based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than the reference number, there is a risk that the player will feel very uncomfortable. Therefore, when the specific measurement number is less than a specific number that is smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect is not executed, but the advance notice effect is executed based on the fact that the specific measurement number is greater than or equal to the specific number. This allows players to understand in advance the situation in which the game will become impossible to play before the specific measured number exceeds the standard number, so that players will not feel great discomfort when the game becomes impossible to play. It is possible to

The invention related to means H2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means H1,
The performance control means is
Execute the advance notice performance (standard number attainment notice performance (next jackpot arrival notice performance and run-up performance)) asynchronously with the currently running performance,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advance notice performance continues at least until the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number (see FIG. 65).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than the specific number, the advance notice performance is executed asynchronously with the performance currently being executed. Then, the advance notice performance is continued until the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. In this way, the advance notice performance that is executed asynchronously after the specific measured number reaches or exceeds the specific number until it reaches the reference number makes it appear to the player that the game will naturally become impossible to play. is possible.

The invention related to means H3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means H1 or means H2,
The performance control means is
The effect design (EZ) that indicates whether it is a win can be displayed in a fixed manner after a fluctuating display.
During the execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced performance pattern (mini performance pattern ez) in which the performance pattern is reduced is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped (see FIGS. 67(B) and 67(D)). It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, during the execution of the advance notice performance, the reduced performance symbols obtained by reducing the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. In this way, it is possible to prevent the advance notice performance from becoming difficult to understand while indicating whether or not it is a win by using the reduced performance symbol instead of the performance symbol.

The invention related to means H4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to means H3,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player,
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the winning game will be executed,
When suggesting that the winning game will be executed during the execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced winning suggesting performance in which the winning suggesting performance is reduced (indicating that the main character is happy after winning the battle) This gaming machine is capable of displaying a background image g113 for mini SP reach (see FIG. 67(D)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when it is suggested that a winning game will be executed during the execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced winning suggestion performance in which the winning suggestion performance is reduced is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the advance notice performance from becoming difficult to understand while suggesting that a winning game will be executed by the reduced winning suggestion performance instead of the winning suggestion performance.

The invention related to means H5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H2 to means H4,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player,
In one winning game, it is set that a specified number (1500) of prize balls can be awarded,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number is a number (78,500) obtained by subtracting the specified number (1,500) from the reference number (80,000).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the specific measured number becomes equal to or less than the specified number, which is the number of prize balls given in one winning game, by the time the specific measured number reaches the reference number, the advance notice effect is executed. In this way, by executing advance notice performances only in situations where the next winning game is likely to become impossible to execute, it is possible to prevent discomfort caused by frequent execution of advance notice performances.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means H1 to H5 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number; The difference is that it is possible to perform an advance notice effect that foretells that the game will be impossible to play based on the above. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means I>
The invention related to means I1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) when it is determined to be a hit (jackpot) in the hit determination process (jackpot determination process);
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling performances,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped),
The performance control means is
Based on the specific measured number reaching a specific number (78500, 79550) that is smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect that foretells that the game will become impossible to execute (the next jackpot is reached as shown in FIG. 72(C)) It is possible to perform a suggestive performance, an over-prized ball abnormality notice performance shown in FIG. 74(B)),
In one winning game, it is set that a specified number (1500, 450) of prize balls can be awarded,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (78500, 79550) is a number obtained by subtracting the specified number (1500, 450) from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, it is conceivable to execute an advance notice effect that foretells that the game will not be playable before the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, but if the advance notice effect is executed frequently, It may cause discomfort. Therefore, if the specific measured number becomes equal to or less than the specified number, which is the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game, by the time the specific measured number reaches the reference number, the advance notice effect is executed. In this way, when the next winning game is likely to become impossible to execute, the advance notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to frequent execution of the advance notice performance.

The invention related to means I2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I1,
The types of winnings include the first winning (jackpot symbol Z2) and the second winning (jackpot symbol Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the first winning, a first specified number (450) of prize balls can be awarded (see FIG. 70);
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500) of prize balls, which is larger than the first specified number, is set to be awardable ( (see Figure 70),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (78,500) is a number obtained by subtracting the second specified number (1,500) from the reference number (80,000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, by the time the specific measured number reaches the reference number, it becomes equal to or less than the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game (second specified number) when it is determined to be a second winning. Based on this, an advance notice performance will be performed. In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of wins, it is possible to execute advance preview performance assuming that the player wins the second win that is advantageous to the player in the next win.

The invention related to means I3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I2,
The performance control means is
Based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than the specific number (78,500) during the execution of the winning game, during the ending of the winning game, the advance notice effect (the next jackpot shown in FIG. 72(C) is reached) This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to start a suggestive performance (see FIG. 71).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number during execution of a winning game, the advance notice performance is started during the ending of the winning game. As a result, just before the end of a winning game, it is possible to make the player aware of a situation that may make it impossible to execute the next winning game by means of advance notice performance. In other words, in the winning game, even if the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, the advance notice performance will not start until the ending starts. Thereby, it is possible for the player to enjoy the winning game without being overly aware that the game will be impossible.

The invention related to means I4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means I1,
The types of winnings include the first winning (jackpot symbol Z2) and the second winning (jackpot symbol Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the first winning, a first prescribed number (450) of prize balls can be awarded (see FIG. 70);
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500) of prize balls, which is larger than the first specified number, is set to be awarded ( (see Figure 70),
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific number (79550) is a number obtained by subtracting the first specified number (450) from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, by the time the specific measured number reaches the reference number, it becomes equal to or less than the first specified number, which is the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game when the first winning is determined. , advance notice performance will be performed. In this way, assuming that the player wins the first win that is disadvantageous to the player in the next win, it is possible to execute the advance notice performance when there is a high possibility that the game will be impossible to execute at least by the next winning game. It is possible.

The invention related to means I5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means I2 to means I4,
The performance control means is
At the timing when the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, the advance notice performance (the over-prized ball abnormality notice performance shown in FIG. 74(B)) can be executed (see FIG. 73). It is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the advance notice performance is executed at the timing when the specific measurement number reaches the reference number and becomes equal to or less than the specified number, which is the number of prize balls given in one winning game. . In this way, when the next winning game is likely to become impossible, it is possible to perform advance notice effects, thereby preventing discomfort caused by frequent execution of advance notice effects. It is.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means I1 to I5 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number; Based on the above, it is possible to execute an advance notice performance that foretells that the game will be impossible to execute, and in one winning game, it is possible to award a specified number of prize balls, and the specific number is a standard number. The difference is that the specified number is subtracted from the specified number. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means J>
The invention related to means J1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with operable operation means (normal button 40, select button),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped),
The performance control means is
Before the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to perform an advance notice performance (an over-prized ball abnormality notice performance, a residual ball number notification performance) that foretells that the game will be impossible to execute,
Based on the operation on the operating means, performance matters related to the advance notice performance (performance matters related to the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance, performance matters related to the residual ball number notification performance) can be set (Fig. 75 (C) (see (D))).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, before the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, an advance notice performance is performed that foretells that the game will become impossible to play. Thereby, it is possible to know in advance the situation in which the game cannot be played, and to avoid causing great discomfort when the game becomes impossible to play. Furthermore, by setting performance matters related to advance notice performance based on operations on the operating means, it is possible to optimally adjust performance matters related to advance notice performance.

The invention related to means J2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means J1,
The performance control means is
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a specific number (75,000) smaller than the reference number, the advance notice performance (the over-prized ball abnormal notice performance shown in FIG. 76(B)) can be executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number (75,000) can be set as a performance item related to the advance notice performance based on an operation on the operation means (see FIG. 75(C)).

Even if the specific measurement number is significantly smaller than the reference number, if advance notice performance is executed, the player will be made to feel excessively anxious. On the other hand, if the advance notice performance is executed just before the specific measurement number reaches the reference number, the player will feel anxious that the game will soon become impossible to play. Therefore, by setting the specific number that triggers the execution of the advance notice performance based on the operation on the operating means, it is possible to appropriately adjust the execution timing of the advance notice performance.

The invention related to means J3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means J2,
The performance control means is
At the time of initial setting after the power is turned on (while displaying the excessive prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 75(C) or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 75(D)) , the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number can be set based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on, an employee of the gaming parlor sets a specific number that will be the trigger for executing the advance notice performance based on the operation on the operating means. In this way, an employee of the game hall can appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the advance notice performance depending on the situation.

The invention related to means J4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means J1 to means J3,
The performance control means determines, as performance matters related to the advance notice performance, whether or not the advance notice performance is executed (whether or not an over-prized ball abnormal notice performance is executed, and the residual difference) based on the operation on the operation means. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to set whether or not to execute a ball number notification effect (see FIGS. 75(C) and 75(D)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when it is desired that the advance notice performance is not executed, non-execution of the advance notice performance is set based on the operation on the operating means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players who wish for the advance notice performance not to be performed from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the advance notice performance.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means J1 to J4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means is capable of controlling the game to be rendered unexecutable before the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It is different in that it is possible to execute an advance notice performance that foretells what will happen, and it is possible to set performance matters related to the advance notice performance based on operations on the operating means. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means K>
The invention related to means K1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
An operable operation means (ball rental button 62),
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising a ball lending control unit (payout control microcomputer 171) capable of lending game balls based on an operation on the operating means,
The game control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition (the number of differential balls is 80,000 or more, illegal magnetism is detected), it is possible to control the game so that it cannot be executed (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped). ),
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable, even if the operation means is operated, the ball rental control unit is made unable to execute the ball rental (ball rental control stop processing shown in step S115 is executed). It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the game is controlled to be impossible to play, the player cannot continue playing the game. At this time, if the player operates the operating means and lends out the game balls, the player who cannot play with the game machine will suffer a loss. Therefore, after the game becomes impossible to play, even if the operating means is operated, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being loaned out, thereby preventing the player from suffering a loss. be.

The invention related to means K2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means K1,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the predetermined stop condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) (stopping the game control process and the firing control process). This is a gaming machine characterized by the following:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Then, even if the player operates the operating means after the game becomes unplayable due to the specific measured number being equal to or greater than the reference number, ball lending will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where ball lending is executed and the player suffers a loss.

The invention related to means K3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means K1 or means K2,
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (illegal magnetism),
The game is characterized in that the game can be controlled to become unplayable (the game control process and the firing control process can be stopped) based on determining that the specific abnormality exists as the predetermined stop condition is met. It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs, the game becomes impossible to play. Thereafter, even if the player operates the operating means, ball lending is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where ball lending is executed and the player suffers a loss.

The invention related to means K4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to means K3,
Equipped with a notification means (balance display section 61) indicating that ball lending is possible,
The notification means is
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to indicate that ball lending is not executable ("E" indicating that ball lending is not executable can be displayed) ) (see FIG. 78(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, a notification means is provided to indicate that ball lending is possible. Then, when the game is controlled to be impossible to play, the notification means indicates that ball lending is impossible to play. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the situation in which ball lending is not executed.

The invention related to means K5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to means K4,
Equipped with a performance control means that can control the performance,
The performance control means is
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, a ball lending not possible notification effect indicating that ball lending is not possible (ball lending not possible notification shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B)) This is a gaming machine characterized by being able to execute (performance).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, a ball lending not possible notification effect indicating that ball lending is impossible is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the situation in which ball lending is not executed.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-070611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is met), the gaming control microcomputer (game control means) disables the execution of the game. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be impossible to play, the player cannot continue playing the game. By the way, even after the game is controlled to be impossible to execute, there is a possibility that the player operates the operating means (ball lending button) in order to lend game balls. However, if game balls are rented out even though the game cannot be played, a situation arises that results in a loss for the player. Therefore, the invention related to means K1 to K5 provides a gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2017-070611, in which when the game control means controls the game so that it cannot be executed, even if the operating means is operated, The difference is that it makes it impossible for the lending control department to lend balls. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that can prevent situations that would cause losses to players (achieve effects).

50...Image display device 50a...Display screen 61...Balance display section 62...Ball lending button 72k...Handle 101...Microcomputer for game control 121...Microcomputer for production control 171...Microcomputer for payout control 191...RAM clear switch PY1...Pachinko game machine

Claims (3)

a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be performed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number ,
It is possible to display the effect pattern that shows whether it is a hit or not after changing it and then stopping.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced performance symbol in which the performance symbol is reduced is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped . a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute winning games that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be executed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number ,
It is possible to execute a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the winning game will be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when suggesting that the winning game will be executed during execution of the advance notice performance, a reduced winning suggesting performance in which the winning suggesting performance is reduced can be executed . a game control means capable of controlling the game;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means capable of controlling a performance,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute winning games that are advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific measured number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The performance control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than a specific number smaller than the reference number, no advance notice performance is performed;
The advance notice performance can be executed based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than the specific number ,
Execute the advance notice performance asynchronously with the currently running performance,
Continuing the advance notice performance at least until the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number,
In one winning game, it is set that a specified number of prize balls can be awarded,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific number is a number obtained by subtracting the specified number from the reference number .

Images